manualshive.com logo in svg

LG KE 770, User Manual

Share
Download
LG KE 770 User Manual Download Page 77

76

ﺎﻫ

 

مﺎﻐﯿﭘ

ﺎﻫ

 

مﺎﻐﯿﭘ

ﺎﻫ

 

مﺎﻐ

ﯿﭘ

ﺎﻫ

 

مﺎ

ﻐﯿﭘ

 

ﺎﻤﺷ

 

ﻪﺑ

 

ﻪﮑﺒﺷ

 

ﺖﻣﺪﺧ

 

ﻦﯾا

 

:

رﺎﺒﺘﻋا

 

تﺪﻣ

  

x

 

یﺎﻫ

 

مﺎﯿﭘ

 

ﺪﯿﻨﮐ

 

ﻦﯿﯿﻌﺗ

 

ﻪﮐ

 

ﺪﻫد

 

ﯽﻣ

 

نﺎﮑﻣا

 

مﺎﯿﭘ

 

ﺰﮐﺮﻣ

 

رد

 

تﺪﻣ

 

ﻪﭼ

 

ﺎﻤﺷ

 

یا

 

ﻪﻧﺎﺳرﺪﻨﭼ

 .

ﺪﻧﺎﻤﺑ

 

ﯽﻗﺎﺑ

 

ﻪﻠﺑ

 

ﻪﻨﻳﺰﮔ

 

بﺎﺨﺘﻧا

 

ترﻮﺻ

 

رد

 

:

ﻞﻳﻮﺤﺗ

 

شراﺰﮔ

  

x

 

لﺎﺳرا

 

ﺖﻴﻘﻓﻮﻣ

 

ﺎﺑ

 

نﺎﺘﻣﺎﻴﭘ

 

ﺪﻴﻨﻴﺒﺑ

 

ﺪﻴﻧاﻮﺘﻴﻣ

.

ﺖﺳا

 

هﺪﺷ

 

زا

 

مﺎﻴﭘ

 

لﺎﺳرا

 

ترﻮﺻ

 

رد

 

:

ﯽﯾﻮﮕﺨﺳﺎﭘ

 

ﻪﻨﯾﺰﻫ

  

x

 

نآ

 

ﻪﻨﻳﺰﻫ

 

ﺖﺧادﺮﭘ

 

ﻪﺑ

 

ردﺎﻗ

 

ﺎﻤﺷ

 

ﻞﺑﺎﻘﻣ

 

یﻮﺳ

.

ﺪﻴﺘﺴﻫ

 

مﺎﯿﭘ

 

ﻪﮐ

 

ﺪﯿﻫاﻮﺨﯿﻣ

 

ﺮﮔا

 

:

مﺎﯿﭘ

 

ﺰﮐﺮﻣ

 

هرﺎﻤﺷ

  

x

 

زا

 

ار

 SMS

 

ﺰﮐﺮﻣ

 

ﯽﻧﺎﺸﻧ

 

،ﺪﯿﺘﺳﺮﻔﺑ

 

ار

 

ﻦﺘﻣ

.

ﺪﯿﻨﮐ

 

ﺖﻓﺎﯾرد

 

ﺪﯿﻧاﻮﺘﯿﻣ

 

ﻮﻨﻣ

 

ﻦﯾا

 

ﻪﺑ

 

طﻮﺑﺮﻣ

 

تﺎﻤﯿﻈﻨﺗ

 

ﺪﯿﻧاﻮﺗ

 

ﯽﻣ

 

:

ﻞﻣﺎﺣ

 

ﻢﻴﻈﻨﺗ

  

x

 .

ﺪﯿﻫد

 

مﺎﺠﻧا

 

ار

 GSM

،

 

GPRS

 

ﺮﯿﻈﻧ

 

ﻞﻣﺎﺣ

(2.0.5

 

ﻮﻨﻣ

)

 

یا

 

ﻪﻧﺎﺳر

 

ﺪﻨﭼ

 

مﺎﯿﭘ

 

ﺖﺳا

 

لﺎﻌﻓ

 

ﻮﻨﻣ

 

ﻦﻳا

 

ﯽﺘﻗو

 

:

عﻮﺿﻮﻣ

  

x

 

ار

 

یا

 

ﻪﻧﺎﺳر

 

ﺪﻨﭼ

 

یﺎﻫ

 

مﺎﯿﭘ

 

عﻮﺿﻮﻣ

 

ﺪﻴﻧاﻮﺗ

 

ﯽﻣ

.

ﺪﻴﻨﮐ

 

دراو

 

تﺪﻣ

 

،مﺎﯿﭘ

 

ﻦﺘﺷﻮﻧ

 

نﺎﮕﻨﻫ

 

:

ﺪﯾﻼﺳا

 

نﺎﻣز

 

تﺪﻣ

  

x

.

ﺪﻫد

 

ﯽﻣ

 

ﺶﯾﺎﻤﻧ

 

ار

 

ﻪﺤﻔﺻ

 

ﺮﻫ

 

نﺎﻣز

 

مﺎﻐﻴﭘ

 

ﺖﻳﻮﻟوا

 

ﺪﻴﻧاﻮﺗ

 

ﯽﻣ

 

ﺎﻤﺷ

 

:

ﺖﻳﻮﻟوا

  

x

.

ﺪﻴﻨﮐ

 

ﻦﻴﻴﻌﺗ

 

ار

 

دﻮﺧ

 

ﯽﺑﺎﺨﺘﻧا

 

هزﺎﺟا

 

ﺎﻤﺷ

 

ﻪﺑ

 

ﺲﻳوﺮﺳ

 

ﻦﻳا

 

:

رﺎﺒﺘﻋا

 

تﺪﻣ

  

x

 

ﺰﮐﺮﻣ

 

رد

 

ﺎﻬﻣﺎﻴﭘ

 

ﻪﮐ

 

ار

 

ﯽﻧﺎﻣز

 

تﺪﻣ

 

ﺎﺗ

 

ﺪﻫﺪﻴﻣ

.

ﺪﻴﻳﺎﻤﻧ

 

ﻦﻴﻴﻌﺗ

 

،ﺪﺷ

 

ﺪﻫاﻮﺧ

 

یراﺪﻬﮕﻧ

 

مﺎﻴﭘ

 

بﺎﺨﺘﻧا

 

ﻮﻨﻣ

 

ﻦﻳا

 

رد

 

ﻪﻠﺑ

 

ﺮﮔا

 

:

ﻞﻳﻮﺤﺗ

 

شراﺰﮔ

  

x

 

ﺎﺑ

 

نﺎﺗ

 

مﺎﻴﭘ

 

ﺎﻳآ

 

ﻪﮐ

 

ﺪﻴﻨﻴﺒﺑ

 

ﺪﻴﻧاﻮﺗ

 

ﯽﻣ

 

،دﻮﺷ

.

ﻪﻧ

 

ﺎﻳ

 

هﺪﺷ

 

هدﺎﺘﺳﺮﻓ

 

ﺖﻴﻘﻓﻮﻣ

 

ﯽﻨﺒﻣ

 

ﯽﺷراﺰﮔ

 

ﺪﯿﻧاﻮﺗ

 

ﯽﻣ

 

:

شراﺰﮔ

 

نﺪﻧاﻮﺧ

  

x

 

ﺖﻓﺎﯾرد

 

ار

 

نآ

 

مﺎﯿﭘ

 

هﺪﻨﻨﮐ

 

ﺖﻓﺎﯾرد

 

ﺎﯾآ

 

ﻪﮑﻨﯾا

 

ﺮﺑ

.

ﺪﯿﻨﮐ

 

ﺖﻓﺎﯾرد

 

ﺮﯿﺧ

 

ﺎﯾ

 

هدﺮﮐ

Summary of Contents for KE 770

Page 1: ...KE770 P N MMBB0238615 1 0 W KE770 KE770 u s e r g u i d e 功能表 电话本 Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider E N G L I S H ...

Page 2: ... ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ راﻫﻨﻤﺎى دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ راﻫﻨﻤﺎى دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ KE770 KE770 ﻓﺎرﺳﯽ ﻓﺎرﺳﯽ ...

Page 3: ... ﮐﺎرت آوردن ﺑﯿﺮون 25 ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮدﻫﺎی ﺑﻪ دادن ﭘﺎﺳﺦ و ﺑﺮﻗﺮاری ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ 28 ﻣﺘﻦ ﮐﺮدن وارد ﻛﺮدن وارد ﺣﺎﻟﺖ دادن ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ 29 ﻣﺘﻦ 32 اﺳﺎﻣﯽ و ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮدﻫﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب 33 ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺣﯿﻦ در ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ 34 ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﯾﮏ ﻃﻮل در ﯾﺎ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی 36 ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ 39 ﻣﻨﻮ درﺧﺘﻰ ﻧﻤﻮدار 42 ﻣﺮورﮔﺮ 43 اﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 43 ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎب ﻣﺤﻞ 44 URL ﺑﻪ رﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺎرﯾﺨﭽﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎت ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ 45 ﭘﻨﻬﺎن ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻮﮐﯽ اﻣﻨﯿﺘﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺠﻮز اﻃﻼﻋﺎت 46 ﺗﻤﺎس ﺳﻮاﺑﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻧﺎﻣ...

Page 4: ...ﻴﻦ ﺻﺪا ﺿﺒﻂ 64 ﻫﺎ ﭘﯿﻐﺎم ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻣﺘﻦ 66 ای ﭼﻨﺪرﺳﺎﻧﻪ 67 اﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮑﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ 69 ورودی اﻃﻼﻋﺎت اﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮑﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت 70 71 ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت 72 ﺷﺪه ارﺳﺎل ﻣﻮارد ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﭘﯿﺎم 73 ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎت 74 اﻟﮕﻮ ﻣﺘﻦ 75 ای رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﯿﺎم ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت 75 ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﻴﻐﺎم 76 ای رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﯿﺎم 77 اﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮑﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ 79 ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺷﺪه ارﺳﺎل ﭘﯿﺎم اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﭘﯿﺎم 81 ﺷﺨﺼﯽ اﺑﺰارﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ 83 ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ 84 اﺳﻨﺎد 85 ﻣﻮارد ﺳﺎ...

Page 5: ...زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ زﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻧﻮر ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ روﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺳﺒﮏ 96 آﻣﺪ ﺧﻮش ﭘﻴﺎم ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻧﺎم اﺗﺼﺎل ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ Bluetooth 98 ﺷﺒﮑﻪ 101 USB اﺗﺼﺎل 102 ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺗﻤﺎس اﻧﺘﻘﺎل 103 ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ را ﺷﻤﺎره 104 ﺗﻤﺎس ﻧﺘﻈﺎر ا دﻗﯿﻘﻪ ﯾﺎداور ﺧﻮدﮐﺎر ﻣﺠﺪد ﮔﯿﺮ ﺷﻤﺎره 105 DTMF ارﺳﺎل اﻣﻨﻴﺖ PIN ﮐﺪ ﺧﻮاﺳﺖ در 106 ﺧﻮدﮐﺎر ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻤﺎس ﮐﺮدن ﻣﺤﺪود 107 ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﻤﺎره ﺷﻤﺎره 108 ﮐﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭘﺮواز ﺣﺎﻟﺖ 109 اﻧﺮژی ذﺧﯿﺮه ...

Page 6: ... ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺣﺎوی راﻫﻨﻤﺎ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺤﻮه ﻣﻮرد در اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی و ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺮای ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ آﻣﺪن وارد ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎدرﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ دﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ را اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ً ﺎ ﻟﻄﻔ در ﮐﻪ اﺻﻼﺣﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺪه ذﮐﺮ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﻐﻮ ...

Page 7: ...ﺎده ﮐﻮﭼﮑﯽ ﺑﻠﻌﻴﺪه ﮐﻮدﮐﺎن ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺷﻮد ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ و ﺷﺪه اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﺧﺎص ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻃﺒﻖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﮑﺎن در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻨﻮع ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﺜﺎل ﻋﻨﻮان ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش را ﺑﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﻤﺎرﺳﺘﺎن در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از ﺑﮕﺬارد ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎس ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﮐﻠﻴﻪ در اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺿﻄﺮاری ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻘﺪور ﺳﻠﻮﻟﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ اﺿﻄﺮاری ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎس ﺧﺼﻮص در ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ اﺗﮑﺎ ﺧﻮد ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ از ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ از ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮی...

Page 8: ...ﻦ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﻪ اﺳﺖ اﺳﺘﻮار و ﺳﻦ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ در ﺑﺪون اﻓﺮاد اﯾﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه ﻃﺮاﺣﯽ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻣﯿﺰان اﻣﻮاج ﻣﻌﺮض در ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻗﺮار ﮔﯿﺮی اﻧﺪازه واﺣﺪ x ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ SFR ﯾﺎ وﯾﮋه ﺟﺬب واﺣﺪ رادﯾﻮﯾﯽ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎ SAR ﻣﯿﺰان ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط آزﻣﺎﯾﺸﺎت ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﯾﻦ در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻪ درﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ و اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد روﺷﻬﺎی درﺣﺎل ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻧﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎم در ﻣﺠﺎز ﻗﺪرت ﺳﻄﺢ اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم اﺳﺖ ﭘﯿﺎم ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮه SAR ﺳﻄﻮح ﺑﯿﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ در x در ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻔﺎوﺗﯽ ﺟﯽ ال ﻣﺘﻨﻮع ﮔ...

Page 9: ...ﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻗﺒﯿﻞ از اﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮑﯽ وﺳﺎﯾﻞ از را ﮔﻮﺷﯽ x دارﯾﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ دور ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ رادﯾﻮ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن ﯾﺎ ﺷﻮﻓﺎژ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺮارﺗﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ از را ﮔﻮﺷﯽ x دارﯾﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ دور آﺷﭙﺰی ﻟﻮازم اﺟﺎق ﯾﺎ ﻣﺎﯾﮑﺮوﯾﻮ ﻧﺰدﯾﮏ را ﺧﻮد ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ x ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی اﻧﻔﺠﺎر ﺑﺎﻋﺚ زﯾﺮا ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺎز ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻧﯿﺎﻧﺪازﯾﺪ زﻣﯿﻦ را ﮔﻮﺷﯽ x ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯿﮑﯽ ﺷﻮﮎ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺮزش ﻣﻌﺮض در را ﮔﻮﺷﯽ x ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ ﻗﺮار ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪه اﺛﺮ در اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ x ﺑﺒﯿﻨﺪ آﺳﯿﺐ وﯾﻨﯿﻠﯽ روﮐﺶ ﯾﺎ ﻟﻔﺎف ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪن...

Page 10: ...ﺧﻮد ﭘﯿﺮاﻫﻦ ﺟﯿﺐ در maker از ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ x ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﭘﯿﺪا ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺳﻤﻌﮏ در ﺟﺰﺋﯽ اﺧﺘﻼﻻت ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ x ﺷﻮد ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ و ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮن رادﯾﻮ ﺟﺎده در اﯾﻤﻨﯽ در را ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻘﺮرات و ﻗﻮاﻧﯿﻦ رﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ راﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ آن در ﮐﻪ ای ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ راﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺣﯿﻦ در دﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از ﻫﺮﮔﺰ x ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﮐﺎر ﺑﻪ راﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﻃﻮل در را ﺧﻮد دﻗﺖ ﺗﻤﺎم x ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻫﻨﺪزﻓﺮی از اﻣﮑﺎن ﺻﻮرت در x ﮐﻨﺪ اﯾﺠ...

Page 11: ...ﯽ ﭘﯿﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ و ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﯾﺎ روﺷﻦ ﺧﻮد ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﻄﺢ ﯾﮏ در را ﺗﻤﺎس زﻧﮓ ﺻﺪای ﯾﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ اﻧﻔﺠﺎری ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻫﺎ آن در اﻧﻔﺠﺎری ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎت ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﯽ در ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از ﮔﯿﺮد ﻣﯽ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻘﺮرات و ﻗﻮاﻧﯿﻦ از و ﮐﺮده رﻋﺎﯾﺖ را ﻫﺎ ﻣﺤﺪودﯾﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﭘﯿﺮوی وﻗﻮع اﺣﺘﻤﺎل ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﯽ دارد وﺟﻮد آﻧﻬﺎ در اﻧﻔﺠﺎر ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﯿﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺎه در x ﻧﺰدﯾﮑﯽ در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﮑﺎرﮔﯿﺮی از ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﻮدداری ﺷﯿﻤﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﻮاد و...

Page 12: ...ﻣﺸﻮرت ﺧﻮد ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت دﻫﻨﺪه اراﺋﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺖ و ﺑﺎﻃﺮی اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﻮر ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺷﺎرژ از ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﻻزم x ﻫﺎی ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ دﯾﮕﺮ ﺧﻼف ﺑﺮ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺨﻠﯿﻪ ﺑﺮ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺪارد وﺟﻮد ای ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ اﺛﺮ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﮔﺬارد ﺗﺄﺛﯿﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺟﯽ ال ﺷﺎرژرﻫﺎی و ﺑﺎﻃﺮی از ﻓﻘﻂ x ﻋﻤﺮ اﻓﺰاﯾﺶ ﺑﺮای ﺟﯽ ال ﺷﺎرژرﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺪ ﺷﺪه ﻃﺮاﺣﯽ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی دارﯾﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺗﻤﯿﺰ را ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻓﻠﺰی اﺗﺼﺎﻟﻬﺎی x ﺑﻪ را ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻗﻄﺐ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎز را ﺑﺎﻃﺮی x ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﻢ آن ﻧﯿﺴ...

Page 13: ...ﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده x ﮔﺮدد اﻧﻔﺠﺎر ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ را ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی x ﮐﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺪه اراﺋﻪ ﻫﺎی دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ دﻓﻊ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺑﻬﯿﻨﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده و اﯾﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻬﯿﻨﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده و اﯾﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻬﯿﻨﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده و اﯾﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻬﯿﻨﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده و اﯾﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ...

Page 14: ...ﻟﻴﺴﺖ دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر اﻧﺪﮐﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ دﻟﺨﻮاه ﻣﻮارد ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮا ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ و ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ در x LCD ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﻗﺪرت ﺑﺎﻻ x ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮدﻫﺎی و ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ x اﻋﺪاد و ﺣﺮوف ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎى ﺷﻤﺎره ﺑﮑﺎر آﻣﺎده ﺣﺎﻟﺖ در x وارد ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎره ﺑﺮای را ﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد ﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣﻨﻮی ﺳﺎزی ﻓﻌﺎل ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﺎ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ و اﻋﺪاد وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ در x ﮐﺎراﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎ ...

Page 15: ...ﭘﺬﯾﺮ اﻣﮑﺎن را ﺑﻮدﯾﺪ ﮐﺮده وارد ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﺎﯾﺎن x ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ در ﮐﻪ را ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮدی ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ اﻳﻦ دﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ اﻧﺠﺎم اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه داده ﻧﺸﺎن ارﺳﺎل ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻳﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ و ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎره x ﺷﺪه ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﮐﺎر ﺑﻪ آﻣﺎده ﺣﺎﻟﺖ در x دﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ را ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﯽ و درﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ اﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﻛﻠﯿﺪ را ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ و ﻛﺮده اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ...

Page 16: ... ﺻﺪای ﻣﻴﺰان ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎز ﮐﺎر ﺑﻪ آﻣﺎده ﺣﺎﻟﺖ در x ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺻﺪای ﻣﻴﺰان ﺗﻤﺎس ﺣﻴﻦ در x ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺣﺪاﮐﺜﺮ ﮐﺮدن ﺑﺎز ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺷﻨﻮاﯾﯽ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ و ﮔﻮش از ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ x ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ 3 ﺻﺪا ﻣﯿﺰان ﮔﻮﺷﯽ و ﻛﺎﺑﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎرژ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ در و ﺑﻮده روﺷﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ USB ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل از ﭘﯿﺶ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺮرﺳﯽ x ﺑﺎﺷﺪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﻗﺮار ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎل ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﯾﺎن ﮐﻠﯿﺪ دارﯾﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺮدن ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﯾﺎ روﺷﻦ x ﺗﻤﺎس ﮐﺮدن رد ﯾﺎ دادن ﭘﺎﯾﺎن x ...

Page 17: ...0 وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى KE770 KE770 وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى ﭘﺸﺖ ﻧﻤﺎى دورﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻼش ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺎرت ﺷﮑﺎف ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ درب ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﻔﻞ را دﮐﻤﻪ اﯾﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ درب ﮐﺮدن ﺑﺎز ﺑﺮای دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر دورﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎى ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺗﺮﻣﯿﻨﺎل ﮐﺎرت ﺳﻴﻢ ﺳﻮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ...

Page 18: ...ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻗﺒﻴﻞ از ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ وارد ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎره ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ داده ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ دارﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ در ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ ﺧﻂ آﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺣﺎل در ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮدﻫﺎﻳﯽ اﺧﺘﺼﺎص ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ دو ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد داده ﻧﺸﺎن ﺷﺪه داده ﻧﻤﺎد ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ و ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﮔﺮاﻓﻴﮑﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ اﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ KE770 KE770 وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى ...

Page 19: ... ﺑﺎﺗﺮى ﺷﺎرژ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ دﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎن را ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﭘﻴﺎم درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪ درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻳﮏ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﮐﻪ دﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺸﺎن اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻟﺮزاﻧﻨﺪه اﺳﺎس ﺑﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻗﺪرت اﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎر 2 از ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎل ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ و ﺗﻤﺎس ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪن ﺻﺎﻣﺖ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺮای ﺑﺎﺷﺪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﭘﯽ در را ﺻﺪا ﺑﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ را ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎر ً ﺎ ﻟﻄﻔ ﺧﻮد ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎر وﺟﻮد ﻋﺪم دارﯾﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ای ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ وﺟﻮد ﻋﺪم ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺣﺎ...

Page 20: ... ﺣﺎل در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻪ دﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎن اﺳﺖ WAP ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ درﺣﺎل ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻪ دﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ GPRS از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺪه ﻓﻌﺎل Bluetooth ﻣﻨﻮی اﺳﺖ در EDGE ﺧﺪﻣﺎت دﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺸﺎن ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺑﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ دﺳﺘﺮس دﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ اﻣﮑﺎن ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ EDGE ﮐﯿﻠﻮﺑﯿﺖ 200 ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎ را ﻫﺎ داده ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ در اﻃﻼع ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ و ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ از ﲤﺎس ﺧﻮد اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺑﻪ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ KE770 KE770 وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى ...

Page 21: ...ﺖ ﺑﺎ را ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺳﭙﺲ دارﯾﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ واروﻧﻪ ﺑﯿﺎورﯾﺪ ﺑﯿﺮون را آن و ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻃﺮف ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﮧ ﺣﺎﻟﻰ در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از ﺑﺎﺗﺮى ﮐﺮدن ﺧﺎرج x ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ روﺷﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻮد ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺎرﮐﺮد در ﻧﻘﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ را ﮐﺎرت ﺳﻴﻢ 2 و دﻫﯿﺪ ﻗﺮار ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻣﺤﻞ در را ﮐﺎرت ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ را ﮐﺎرت ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﯿﺎﻓﺘﺪ ﺟﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻠﻐﺰاﻧﯿﺪ را آن اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن دﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ آن ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ درﺳﺖ ﮐﺎرت ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎرت روى رﻧﮓ ﻃﻼﻳﻰ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻗﺴﻤﺖ و ﺷﺪه ﮐﺎرت ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ...

Page 22: ...ﺼﺐ ﮐﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﯾﺎ و ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻫﻨﮕﺎم آوردن ﺑﯿﺮون از اﺳﺖ روﺷﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺻﻮرت اﯾﻦ ﻏﯿﺮ در ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﻮدداری ﮐﺎرت ﺳﯿﻢ دﺳﺖ از ﺷﺪه ذﺧﯿﺮه اﻃﻼﻋﺎت اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﮔﺮدد آﺳﯿﺐ دﭼﺎر ﮐﺎرت ﺳﯿﻢ ﯾﺎ و ﺑﺮود ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ را ﺑﺎﺗﺮی 3 ﻗﺮار ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ در ای ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ را ﺑﺎﺗﺮی اﺗﺼﺎل ﻧﻘﺎط ﺑﺎ آن اﺗﺼﺎل ﻧﻘﺎط ﮐﻪ دﻫﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﭘﯿﺪا ﺗﻤﺎس ﻓﻠﺰی ﺗﺎ دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ را ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﻮﮎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ را ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ درب ﺑﯿﺎﻓﺘﺪ ﺟﺎ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﯾﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ...

Page 23: ...ﺘﻮر دﻳﮕﺮ اﻧﺘﻬﺎی 3 اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻨﺪی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ داﺧﻞ ﺷﺎرژر از ﻓﻘﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﺎرژ اﲤﺎم از ﭘﺲ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﳕﺎد ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻴﻠﻪ 4 ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﺷﺎرژ ﻧﻤﺎد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ً ﻼ ﮐﺎﻣ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی اﮔﺮ TA اﺗﺼﺎل از ﺑﻌﺪ دﻗﯿﻘﻪ 1 5 ﺗﺎ 1 ً ﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ LCD ﺻﻔﺤﻪ روی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ زﻳﺮا ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ را راﺑﻂ ﺑﺮق آداﭘﺘﻮر ﻳﺎ و ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﺮاﺑﻰ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﺳﺖ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺮق ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻮدی ﺑﻄﻮر را ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎرژر ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ دﻳﻮاری ﺧﻮد ﮐﺸﻮر از ﺧﺎرج در ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎرژر از اﮔﺮ...

Page 24: ...ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺣﯿﻮاﻧﺎت دﻧﺪان ﺳﻮزی آﺗﺶ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ زﯾﺮا ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﺷﻮد ﺷﺎرژر ﮐﺮدن ﺟﺪا ﺟﺪا ﮔﻮﺷﯽ از ﺳﯿﻢ ﻧﻪ و راﺑﻂ ﮐﺸﯿﺪن ﺑﺎ را ﺷﺎرژر ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺎرت دادن ﻗﺮار ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺷﮑﺎف در ای ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ را ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺎرت در ﮐﻪ ﻧﺤﻮی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﻮر ﺑﻪ ﮐﻪ دﻫﯿﺪ ﻗﺮار ﻗﺮار ﺷﮑﺎف در اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه داده ﻧﺸﺎن زﯾﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﮔﯿﺮد اﺣﺘﻴﺎط رو ﺑﺎﯾﺪ رﻧﮓ ﻃﻼﯾﯽ ﻫﺎی دﻫﻨﺪه اﺗﺼﺎل x ﮐﺎرت ﺷﮑﺎف در اﺑﺘﺪا و ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪ ﻗﺮار ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ...

Page 25: ...ﺣﺘﻴﺎط اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ای ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎرت از ﻓﻘﻂ x رﺳﯿﺪه ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﺎرت از ﺑﺮﺧﯽ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﻤﺨﻮاﻧﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮐﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﯾﺎ و ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺎرت آوردن ﺑﯿﺮون از اﺳﺖ روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺻﻮرت اﯾﻦ ﻏﯿﺮ در ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﻮدداری ﮐﺎرت ﯾﺎ و ﺑﺮود دﺳﺖ از ﺷﺪه ذﺧﯿﺮه اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﮔﺮدد آﺳﯿﺐ دﭼﺎر ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ...

Page 26: ...ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ از اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه داده ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﻮدداری آﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ دادن ﭘﺎﺳﺦ و ﺑﺮﻗﺮاری ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺮﻗﺮاری اﺳﺖ روﺷﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ 1 ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎره ای ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻛﺪ ﻛﺮدن وارد ﺑﺎ 2 ﺷﻤﺎره اﺻﻼح ﺑﺮای ﻛﻨﯿﺪ وارد را ﻧﻈﺮ ﭘﺎك ﺷﻤﺎره ﻛﻞ دﻛﻤﻪ داﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺑﺎ x ﻣﯿﺸﻮد اﺗﺼﺎل ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺮای را ارﺳﺎل دﻛﻤﻪ 3 دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺷﻤﺎره دﻛﻤﻪ ﯾﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻪ دادن ﭘﺎﯾﺎن ﺑﺮای 4 ﻓﺸﺎر را ﯾﺎ دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را راﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ دﻫﯿﺪ آﻧﱳ ...

Page 27: ...ﻤﺎره و ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻛﺪ و ﻛﺸﻮر ﻛﺪ 2 ﻛﻨﯿﺪ وارد را ﺧﻮد دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺮای 3 ﺗﻤﺎس ﯾﻚ ﺑﻪ دادن ﭘﺎﯾﺎن ﺳﻤﺖ دﻛﻤﻪ ﯾﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻪ دادن ﭘﺎﯾﺎن ﺑﺮای دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﯾﺎ دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را راﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ از ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺮﻗﺮاری ﺑﻪ ﮐﻪ را ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎره و ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻤﺎس آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ و دارﯾﺪ ﮐﺎر و ﺳﺮ آن ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮل ﻃﻮر ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ذﺧﯿﺮه ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ در ﮔﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﻣﯽ ذﺧﯿﺮه ﺧﻮد ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﯾﺎ و ﮐﺎرت ﺳﯿﻢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ در را آﻧﻬﺎ در دﻟﺨﻮاه ﻧﺎم ﻫﺮ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻦ ...

Page 28: ...ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻪ دادن ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﺮای 1 ﻓﺸﺎر را ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪی ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ دﻫﯿﺪ ﺷﺪه داده ﺗﺨﺼﯿﺺ 9 5 2 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺟﺰ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪی ﻫﺮ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮان ﻣﯽ راﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ و داد ﭘﺎﺳﺦ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﻋﻨﻮان ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﯿﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ اﮔﺮ x ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﯾﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ از ﻏﯿﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎ دﮐﻤﻪ از ﯾﻚ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﯿﮕﺮدد اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎی ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮ از درﺣﺎﻟﯿﻜﻪ x ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻪ ﻣﯿﺘﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯿﻜﻨﯿﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎ...

Page 29: ...ﺒﺎرﺗﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در ﻣﺘﻦ ورود روﺷﻬﺎی T9 ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﺑﺪون ﻣﯿﻜﻨﺪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﯾﻦ ﺑﻪ T9 ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ آن ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﯾﻚ ﺣﺮوف ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﯾﻚ ﺑﺎ را ﺷﺪه وارد ﺣﺮوف ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻃﻮر ﺗﺎﯾﭗ را ﺻﺤﯿﺢ ﻟﻐﺖ و ﻣﯿﻜﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﮔﻮﺷﯽ داﺧﻞ ABC ﻗﺪﯾﻤﯽ روش ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﯾﺴﻪ در ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﯾﻦ ﻣﯿﻜﻨﺪ اﯾﻦ ﻛﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﻣﯿﺒﺎﯾﺴﺖ را ﻛﻤﺘﺮی ﺣﺮوف ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻋﻨﻮان ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﺑﯿﻨﯽ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﺎم ﺑﻪ ً ﺎ ﮔﺎﻫ روش ﻣﯿﺸﻮد ABC ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺮوف ﺑﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ دﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﯿﺒﺎﯾﺴﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﯾﻦ در ﺗﻌﺪاد اﺳﺎس ﺑﺮ را...

Page 30: ... ﻛﻤﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻣﯿﻜﻨﺪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺖ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎی دﮐﻤﻪ ﻛﻪ را ﺑﻌﺪی ﺣﺮوف ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ﯾﺎﺑﯿﺪ ﻛﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ را آن ﻣﯿﺨﻮاﻫﯿﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯿﻜﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮر ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎر اﯾﻦ ﻣﯿﺪﻫﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺻﻮرت ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯿﮕﯿﺮد ﺻﻮرت ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﯾﻚ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ را ﺟﺪﯾﺪی ﻟﻐﺖ ﻣﯿﺘﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎن زﯾﺎد ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻟﻐﺎت ﺗﻌﺪاد اﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﯿﺪ وارد ﺧﻮد ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻟﻐﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯿﮕﺮدد ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ دارد ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ در را ﺷﺒﺎﻫﺖ و ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮ...

Page 31: ...ﯾﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻮرد زﺑﺎن ﻧﻤﺎﺋﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را T9 زﺑﺎن ﺳﭙﺲ در را T9 ﺣﺎﻟﺖ و اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را T9 ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻈﺮ دﻫﯿﺪ ﻗﺮار ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﺑﺘﺪا ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﭘﺎك ﯾﺎ اﺻﻼح از ﻗﺒﻞ 2 ﻛﻨﯿﺪ وارد ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﻮر ﺑﻪ را ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ را ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻫﺮ دﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ 3 را دﻛﻤﻪ ﺣﺮوف ﻛﺮدن ﭘﺎك ﺑﺮای ﻛﻨﯿﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﯾﺪ و ﻓﺸﺮده را دﻛﻤﻪ دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺷﻮد ﭘﺎك ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻛﻞ ABC ﺣﺎﻟﺖ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮدن وارد ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻫﺎی دﮐﻤﻪ از ﻧﻤﺎﺋﯿﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺧﻮد ﻣﺘﻦ روی ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎن ﻣﻮرد ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎ...

Page 32: ...ﺪاد ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﯾﻚ ﻣﺜﺎل ﺑﺮای ﻧﻤﺎﺋﯿﺪ وارد ﻋﺪد ﺧﻮد ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎره از ﻗﺒﻞ را ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮرد اﻋﺪاد ﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻛﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﻛﺮدن وارد ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﯽ ﻃﻮر ﺑﻪ اﯾﻨﻜﻪ و دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﯾﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ داﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺑﺮوﯾﺪ اﻋﺪاد ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮوف از ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎدی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎی ﻛﺮدن وارد اﻣﻜﺎن ﻧﻤﺎدی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮای را ﺧﺎص ﮐﺎراﮐﺘﺮی ﯾﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﻛﻠﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﺎد ﯾﻚ ﻛﺮدن وارد ﺑﺮای ﻛﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی از ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻤﺎد...

Page 33: ...ﻮﻣﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮدﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮدﻫﺎی اﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ در را ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎره و ﻧﺎم ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻌﻼوه ﻛﻨﯿﺪ ذﺧﯿﺮه ﻛﺎرت ﺳﯿﻢ ﻛﻨﯿﺪ ذﺧﯿﺮه ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ در را ﻧﺎم و ﺷﻤﺎره ١٠٠٠ ﯾﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ و ﻛﺎرت ﺳﯿﻢ از اﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﻣﻨﻮی در ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺻﻮرت ...

Page 34: ...ر را ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮدﻫﺎ از ای ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﯾﻦ ﺧﻮد ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ دﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻗﺮار ﺷﻤﺎ اﺧﺘﯿﺎر ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ در ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮدﻫﺎ اﯾﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺳﻔﺎرﺷﯽ را ﻃﺮﯾﻖ از و اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻌﺒﯿﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی و ﻗﺎﺑﻞ و ﻫﺎی ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ دو ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی و ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎت ﮐﻪ دﻫﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ را اﻣﮑﺎن اﯾﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ دﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ و ﮐﺮده ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را ﺧﺎص ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮدﻫﺎی ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ اﺳﺎس ﺑﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﻧﻘﺶ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﻂ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﻧﺸﺎن را ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻧﻘﺶ ﮐﻠﯿ...

Page 35: ...ﮕﺎﻣﯽ دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ارﺳﺎل DTMF اﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش زﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻤﺎس ﯾﻚ ﻃﻮل در ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ روی ﺷﺪه داده ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ آﻣﺎده زﻣﺎن در ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻃﻮل در ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﺸﺮﯾﺢ ذﯾﻞ در آﻧﺎن اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻬﺎی و اﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﮑﺎر اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺛﺎﻧﻮﯾﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺮﻗﺮاری ﻣﻮرد ﺷﻤﺎره ﺛﺎﻧﻮﯾﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس اﯾﺠﺎد ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﯿﺘﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺧﻮد ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮ از را ﺧﻮد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺳﭙﺲ داده ﻓﺸﺎر را راﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﯿﺪ ذﺧﯿﺮه ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮ داﺧﻞ در ﺷﺪه...

Page 36: ...و ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻓﻌﺎل ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎت ﺑﺮای ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ وﯾﮋﮔﯽ اﯾﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﯿﺪ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ 9 5 4 ﺻﻔﺤﻪ درﯾﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻪ ﻧﺪادن ﭘﺎﺳﺦ آن درﯾﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻪ دادن ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﺪون ﻣﯿﺘﻮاﻧﯿﺪ را دﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﺎدﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ اﯾﻨﻜﺎر ﺑﺮای و ﻛﻨﯿﺪ رد را دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪﺑﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺣﯿﻦ در ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ رد را ورودی ﺗﻤﺎس رد راﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ دادن ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ دﻫﯿﺪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ و ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰ...

Page 37: ...اﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ اﺻﻠﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻪ وﻟﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ درﯾﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ از اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎن ﺗﻤﺎس ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ دﺳﺘﺮس آﻏﺎز زﻣﺎن از اﺳﺖ ﻧﻔﺮ ۵ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی در دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ را ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺷﻤﺎ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎن ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣﯿﺘﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ و ﻣﯿﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﯿﺪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪی دوم ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺮﻗﺮاری ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣﯿﻜﻨﯿﺪ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﯿﻜﻪ در ﻣﯿﺘﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ را دوم ﺗﻤﺎس ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﺎزﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار دوﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار دوم ﺗﻤﺎس زﻣﺎﻧﯿﻜﻪ دﻫﯿﺪ ...

Page 38: ...ﺎی ازدﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﯿﻜﻨﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺴﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﯿﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﭘﺎﺋﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻃﻮل در ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯽ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺮﻗﺮاری ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﯿﻦ از ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯽ ﺗﻤﺎس ﯾﻚ اﯾﺠﺎد ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس ﺷﻤﺎره ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎن ﺳﻤﺖ دﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ و ﻛﺮده ﻣﺸﺨﺺ را ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ دادن ﻗﺮار ﺟﻬﺖ دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﭼﭗ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯽ ﮔﺮوﻫﯽ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ دﯾﮕﺮ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎن دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻪ دادن ﭘﺎﯾﺎن ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺑﯿﻦ از ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﺎﯾﺎن ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮدد ﻗﻄﻊ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻣﯿﺘﻮا...

Page 39: ... ﭘﺎﯾﺎن ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ اﻛﻨﻮن ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس ﻛﻠﯿﺪ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ داده ﻛﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺑﺮای ﺷﻮد ﻗﻄﻊ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﺳﭙﺲ دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﯿﺪ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر از ﭘﺲ ﻛﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻧﻔﺮه ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ داده ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ و ﻓﻌﺎل ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎس ...

Page 40: ... ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮوﯾﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ دار ﺷﻤﺎره ﮐﻠﯿﺪ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﻮ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر از ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﯿﺰ و ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻣﺮورﮔﺮ 1 اﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 1 1 ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎب ﻣﺤﻞ 2 1 URL ﺑﻪ رﻓﺘﻦ 3 1 ﺗﺎرﯾﺨﭽﻪ 4 1 ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎت 5 1 اﻃﻼﻋﺎت 6 1 ﺗﻤﺎس ﺳﻮاﺑﻖ 2 ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎم 1 2 ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎس 2 2 ﺷﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی 3 2 درﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی 4 2 ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﺪت 5 2 ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ 6 2 ﻫﺎ داده اﻃﻼﻋﺎت 7 2 اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ ...

Page 41: ...ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮداری دورﺑﻴﻦ 3 4 ﺻﺪا ﺿﺒﻂ 4 4 ﻫﺎ ﭘﯿﻐﺎم 5 ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺎم 1 5 ورودی اﻃﻼﻋﺎت 2 5 اﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮏ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻨﺪوق 3 5 ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ 4 5 ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت 5 5 ﺷﺪه ارﺳﺎل ﻣﻮارد 6 5 ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ 7 5 اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﭘﯿﺎم 8 5 اﻟﮕﻮ 9 5 ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت 0 5 ﺷﺨﺼﯽ اﺑﺰارﻫﺎی 6 ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ 1 6 ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ 2 6 ﻫﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ 3 6 اﺳﻨﺎد 4 6 ﻣﻮارد ﺳﺎﻳﺮ 5 6 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ و ﺑﺎزﻳﻬﺎ 6 6 ﺧﺎرﺟﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ 7 6 ...

Page 42: ...x 7 اﺳﺎﻣﯽ 8 ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ 1 8 ﺟﺪﯾﺪ اﻓﺰودن 2 8 ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎره 3 8 ﻫﺎ ﮔﺮوه 4 8 ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ 5 8 ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬف 6 8 ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت 7 8 اﻃﻼﻋﺎت 8 8 ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت 9 ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ 1 9 زﺑﺎن 2 9 ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 3 9 اﺗﺼﺎل ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ 4 9 ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﻤﺎس 5 9 اﻣﻨﻴﺖ 6 9 ﭘﺮواز ﺣﺎﻟﺖ 7 9 اﻧﺮژی ذﺧﯿﺮه 8 9 ﻓﺮض ﭘﯿﺶ ﻣﺠﺪد ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎت 9 9 ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ 0 9 ...

Page 43: ...ﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ داد ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﺸﺎن و ﻫﺎ ﺳﺮوﯾﺲ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﮑﺎر ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ دﻫﻨﺪه اراﺋﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎت ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ داده ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ دارد ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت و ﺳﺮوﯾﺲ آن ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﯾﺘﯽ وب ﻫﺮ URL آدرس ﮐﺮدن وارد ﺑﺎ در ﻣﺮورﮔﺮ از ﺧﺮوج ﺑﺮای ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ داﺷﺘﻪ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻫﺮزﻣﺎن ﮔﺸﺖ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﺎز ﺧﻮد ﺑﺎش آﻣﺎده WAP ﮐﺎوﺷﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﮐﺎوﺷﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ﯾﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ اﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ در WAP...

Page 44: ...ﺪه ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﯿﺶ از ﯾﺎب ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻮان ﻧﻤﯽ را ﺷﺪه ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﯿﺶ از ﻫﺎی ﯾﺎب ﻣﺤﻞ ﮐﺮد ﺣﺬف ﯾﺎب ﻣﺤﻞ اﯾﺠﺎد ﺑﺮای ﻓﺸﺎر را ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ 1 دﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ و ﻛﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ 2 دﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را URL آدرس و ﻋﻨﻮان ﮐﺮدن وارد از ﭘﺲ 3 دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻮردﻧﻈﺮ زﯾﺮ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻮردﻧﻈﺮ ﯾﺎب ﻣﺤﻞ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب از ﭘﺲ اﺳﺖ دﺳﺘﺮس در ﭘﯿﺶ از آدرس ﺑﻪ ﻣﯿﺘﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ اﯾﻦ از اﺗﺼﺎل x ﺷﻮﯾﺪ وﺻﻞ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ را ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه...

Page 45: ...ﺳﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده اﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮض ﭘﯿﺶ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮرﻫﺎ از ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺑﺮای اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه ذﺧﯿﺮه ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ در ﮐﻪ دارد وﺟﻮد ﭘﺬﯾﺮ اﻣﮑﺎن ﻓﺮض ﭘﯿﺶ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻧﺎم ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ زﯾﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل را ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل x ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ را ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ وﯾﺮاﯾﺶ x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ وﯾﺮاﯾﺶ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ x ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪی ﻟﯿﺴﺖ از ...

Page 46: ...ﻨﻬﺎن ﺗﻮﺟﻪ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻓﺮدار ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎن ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ x اﺳﺘﻔﺎده داده ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ذﺧﯿﺮه ﺑﺮای ﮐﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ 3 5 1 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻮﮐﯽ ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻮﻛﯽ آﯾﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺮرﺳﯽ ﺧﯿﺮ ﯾﺎ 4 5 1 ﻣﻨﻮ اﻣﻨﯿﺘﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺠﻮز در ﮐﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻣﺠﻮزﻫﺎی ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه ذﺧﯿﺮه ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ 6 1 6 1 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ داده ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ WAP ﻣﺮورﮔﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ...

Page 47: ... ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ x ذﺧﻴﺮه آدرس دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ در را آن ﻳﺎ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﮐﻨﻴﺪ وارد ﺷﻤﺎره ﺑﺮای را ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﻧﺎم ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ x ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ذﺧﻴﺮه آدرس دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ در را دو ﻫﺮ و ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎم ﺷﻤﺎره اﻳﻦ ﺑﺮای ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ x ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺬف ﻟﻴﺴﺖ از را ﺗﻤﺎس ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ x 3 2 3 2 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺗﻤﺎس 50 ﮐﻪ دﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ اﻣﮑﺎن ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ اﻳﻦ را ﻧﺸﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی اﺧﻴﺮ ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ و ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ...

Page 48: ...ﺧﻴﺮه آدرس دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ارﺳﺎل ﺷﻤﺎره اﻳﻦ ﺑﺮای را ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ x ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺣﺬف ﻟﻴﺴﺖ از را ﺗﻤﺎس x 5 2 5 2 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﻣﺪت ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ اﻣﮑﺎن ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را ﺧﻮد ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ و ورودی ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ً ا ﻣﺠﺪد را ﺗﻤﺎس زﻣﺎن ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ اﺳﺖ دﺳﺘﺮس در زﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎس آﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺪت ﺗﻤﺎس آﺧﺮﻳﻦ x ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣﺪت ﺷﺪه ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی x ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ ورودی ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﻣﺪت درﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی x ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﻣﺪت ﮐﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ...

Page 49: ... را ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﺠﺪد ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ و ﺑﺎﻗﯿﻤﺎﻧﺪه ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ 2 ﭘﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﺠﺪد ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﺮای ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺮرﺳﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﯿﺎز 7 2 7 2 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺎ داده اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻃﺮﻳﻖ از ﺷﺒﮑﻪ از ﺷﺪه داده اﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺣﺠﻢ ﻧﻴﺰ و دﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ را آس آر ﭘﯽ ﺟﯽ GPRS ﮔﺮدد ﻣﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﺎن ﻣﺪت ﺧﻂ روی ﮐﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺪت ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻋﻼوه ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻧﯿﺰ را اﯾﺪ ﺑﻮده ...

Page 50: ...LMT ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ داده ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ از ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ 1 ﺷﺪه ﻣﻔﻘﻮد ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ردﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ 2 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را LMT ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را LMT ﺗﺘﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ 3 ﮐﻠﯿﺪ و ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را روﺷﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ 4 دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ 2 1 3 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻋﺒﻮر ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ داده ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ از ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ 1 ﺷﺪه ﻣﻔﻘﻮد ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ردﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ 2 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را LMT ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻋﺒﻮر ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ 3 را ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻋﺒﻮر ﮐﻠﻤﻪ و ﻗﺪﯾﻤﯽ ﻋﺒﻮر ﮐﻠﻤﻪ 4 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ وا...

Page 51: ...ﺎن ﮐﻨﺪ ﭘﯿﺪا دﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻔﻘﻮد ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ردﯾﺎﺑﯽ وارد و ﻗﺪﯾﻤﯽ LMT ﮐﺪ ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺎرﺑﺮ دﻫﺪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ را LMT ﮐﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ LMT ﮐﺪ ﮐﺮدن و ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺎم ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺑﺮای LMT ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎت ﺻﻮرت در ﺗﺎ اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه داده ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ SMS ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ رﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻮد ارﺳﺎل ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره آن ﺑﺮای ﺷﺪه ﻣﻔﻘﻮد اﻋﻀﺎی ﯾﺎ دوﺳﺘﺎن ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻮاده ﺷﺪه ﻣﻔﻘﻮد ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ردﯾﺎﺑﯽ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺤﻮه ﺑﺮوﯾﺪ اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﻪ 1 ﺷﺪه ﻣﻔﻘﻮد ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ رد...

Page 52: ... 3 3 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ اﻳﻦ وارد زﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﺑﺮای ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻳﻦ رأس در ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ را ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﮐﻪ وﻗﺖ ﻫﺮ دارد ﻗﺮار ﺧﺎﻧﻪ وﻳﮏ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﺪا ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ آن ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺧﺎص روز ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺪه ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺮده ﮐﺎر ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﮑﺎن ﻣﻴﺸﻮد را ﻋﻼﻣﺖ اﻳﻦ اﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﺪ را ﻣﻌﻴﻦ روز ﺗﺎ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻪ آﻧﺴﺖ ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﺑﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﻨﻮی در ﻋﻤﻞ اﻳﻦ دارد وﺟﻮد روز آن در ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ ﮐﻤﮏ ...

Page 53: ...ﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬف و دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ زﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ SMS x ﺧﺎﺻﯽ زﻣﺎن ﺗﺎرﯾﺦ ﺑﻪ را ﺟﺪﯾﺪی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ SMS ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ اﻓﺰودن x اﻣﮑﺎن را ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮرد روز ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اﻓﺰودن ﺳﺎزد ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ ذﺧﻴﺮه ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ 100 ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪاﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ و ﮐﻨﻴﺪ وارد را ﻣﻮﺿﻮع اﻃﻼﻋﺎت دﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ذﺧﯿﺮه ﭼﭗ ﻫﺸﺪار و ﺗﮑﺮار زﻣﺎن زﻳﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ در را درﺳﺘﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ وارد رﯾﺰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ آﻫﻨﮓ x ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ را ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺗﺎ...

Page 54: ...ﻨﺪی زﻣﺎن ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اﻓﺰودن ﺟﺪﯾﺪ زﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ SMS x اﻣﮑﺎن را ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮرد روز ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﯾﺎدداﺷﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺻﺪ ﺣﺪاﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﺎزد ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ و ﮐﻨﯿﺪ درج را ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ذﺧﯿﺮه را ﯾﺎدداﺷﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ وارد ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ در را ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت دﻫﯿﺪ ﻫﺸﺪار و ﺗﮑﺮار زﻣﺎن ﮐﻨﯿﺪ زﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ و SSMS ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ وﯾﺮاﯾﺶ را ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب زﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ SMS ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺬف x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺣﺬف را ﺷﺪه ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺗﻮا...

Page 55: ...اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺮای را ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ 2 دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ وارد را اﻋﺪاد ﺳﭙﺲ 3 ﻓﺸﺎر را ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ 4 دﻫﯿﺪ را ﮐﻠﻴﺪ اﻋﺸﺎری ﻋﺪد ﮐﺮدن وارد ﺑﺮای 5 دﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺣﺴﺎب ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﮐﺎر ﺑﻪ دادن ﭘﺎﯾﺎن ﺟﻬﺖ 6 دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ راﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ 5 3 5 3 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ OK ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ 1 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ را ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻮدن ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺻﻮرت در 2 دﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ و ﻛﺮده وارد را ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ 3 دﻫﻴﺪ ...

Page 56: ...ﻣﯿﺘﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ 1 ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را واﺣﺪ ﭼﻬﺎر اﯾﻦ ﮐﻪ واﺣﺪی ﺑﺮای را ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ارزش 2 دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮاﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺒﺪل در ﻧﻤﺎد ﮐﺮدن وارد ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻏﯿﺮ واﺣﺪ ارزش ﻫﺎی دﮐﻤﻪ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎ 3 ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را واﺣﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد 8 3 8 3 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﯿﺘﻮاﻧﯿﺪ را ﺟﻬﺎن ﻋﻤﺪه ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎی ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﮑﺎن ﯾﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 1 ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺑﺎ را ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺧﺎص زﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯿﺘﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﭼﭗ...

Page 57: ...ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻫﻨﮕﺎم در x ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ای رﺳﺎﻧﻪ اﺳﺖ 1 4 1 4 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﭘﺨﺶ داﺧﻠﯽ MP3 ﭘﺨﺶ ﯾﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ KE770 از ﯾﺎ ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﯾﮏ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎ اﺳﺖ ﺷﻨﯿﺪن از ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ داﺧﻠﯽ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮی ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ در ﻣﻮﺟﻮد MP3 ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺒﺮﯾﺪ ﻟﺬت ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ اﺑﻌﺎد ﺑﻮدن ﮐﻮﭼﮏ دﻟﯿﻞ ﺑﻪ x ﺻﺪا اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺣﺎﻻت ﺑﻌﻀﯽ در ﮐﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﯽ ً ﺎ ﺧﺼﻮﺻ ﺷﻮد ﻧﺎﻣﻔﻬﻮم ﺻﺪای و ﺣﺪاﮐﺜﺮ ﺣﺎﻻت روی ﺻﺪا ﻣﯿﺰان ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﯾﻦ اﺳﺖ ز...

Page 58: ...ﮐﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ MP3 ﻗﺎﻟﺐ از را ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ دﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ AAC ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ اﻧﺒﻮه اﻧﺒﺎر از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر راﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﯾﮏ از را MP3 دﻫﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺧﻮد ﮐﺎﺑﻞ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎ را ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﻤﺎن در ﮐﻪ USB ﻋﻨﻮان ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ وﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ اﮐﺴﭙﻠﻮر وﯾﻨﺪوز ﻃﺮﯾﻖ از ﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺟﺪا دﯾﺴﮏ ﯾﮏ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده درﺻﻮرت ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داده ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ را اﻧﺒﻮه ﺳﺎزی ذﺧﯿﺮه دراﯾﻮر ﺑﺎﯾﺪ Win98 SE ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ...

Page 59: ...ﻪ 2 را ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را MP3 دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﺎل در MP3 ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﮑﺚ x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ً ﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﺘ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب MP3 ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ در را دﯾﮕﺮی در ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ زﻧﮓ ﺻﺪای ﻋﻨﻮان ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ x ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ را MP3 ﻓﺎﻳﻞ در ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﺎل ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻧﮓ ﺻﺪای ﻋﻨﻮان رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﯿﺎم رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﯿﺎم رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﯿﺎم رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﯿﺎم اﮐﻮﻻﯾﺰر ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﺎم اﺟﺮا زﻣﺎن اﺳﺘﺮﯾﻮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﺑﺪون ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻧﻮار ﺻﺪا...

Page 60: ...ﻠﻮه ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﺟﻠﻮه واﻗﻌﯽ ﻃﯿﻒ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی زﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﻨﻮ اﯾﻦ ﮐﺎذب ﻃﯿﻒ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﺎزد ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ اﻣﮑﺎن را MP3 ﺗﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻫﺪات اﺳﺎس ﺑﺮ آﻫﻨﮕﻬﺎ x ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ در راﻳﺖ ﮐﭙﻲ ﻣﻠﻲ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ و ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣﺠﺎز ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺮداري ﮐﭙﻲ ﻳﺎ و ﮐﺮدن ﮐﭙﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻻزم ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎزآﻓﺮﻳﻨﻲ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ در ﮐﻨﻴﺪ درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺠﻮز از ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﮐﺮدن ﮐﭙﻲ ﮐﺸﻮرﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮع راﻳﺖ ﮐﭙﻲ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ...

Page 61: ...ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده زﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺼﺮف ﻣﯿﺰان دورﺑﯿﻦ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻫﻨﮕﺎم x ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺻﻮرت در ﯾﺎﺑﺪ ﻣﯽ اﻓﺰاﯾﺶ ﻧﯿﺮو ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ روی ﺑﺮ ﻧﻤﺎد ﺷﺪن در اﺳﺖ ﮐﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎرژ ﻣﯿﺰان زﻣﯿﻨﻪ را ﺑﺎﺗﺮی اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭘﯿﺶ ﺻﻮرت اﯾﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺷﺎرژ را ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺑﺮای اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه داده ﻧﺸﺎن زﯾﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ در ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ آن ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ 12 3 آﻟﺒﻮم آﻟﺒﻮم ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ 2 1 دورﺑﻴﻦ 3 از ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎت ﺣﺎﻟﺖ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺻﻮرت در ﺣﺘﯽ ﯾﺎ و ...

Page 62: ...ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺟﺪاﺳﺎزی از اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﻣﺮ اﯾﻦ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮا ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺧﻮدداری در اﺧﺘﻼل اﯾﺠﺎد ﯾﺎ و ﺳﻮزی آﺗﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﻮد دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد را ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ اﻧﺪازه ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ اﻧﺪازه x 1600x1200 ﺳﺎزد ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ اﻣﮑﺎن 640x480 1280x960 ﮐﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ 320x240 320x240 640x480 واﮐﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ اﻣﮑﺎن ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد اﯾﻦ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ x و ﺧﻮب ﺑﻪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد از را ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺳﺎزد ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ اﻣﮑﺎن ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮای ﺧﻮب ﺑﺴﯿﺎر ﺗﺎرﯾﮏ ﻣﮑﺎن در زﻣﺎﻧﯿﮑﻪ ﻓﻼش x از اﺳﺘﻔﺎد...

Page 63: ...روز ﺻﺪای ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ دﯾﺎﻓﺮاﮔﻢ آﻫﻨﮓ x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ را ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم دورﺑﯿﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎت ﺑﺎزﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺠﺪد ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ x ﺳﺎزد ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ اﻣﮑﺎن را 3 4 3 4 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮداری دورﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮداری دورﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻮی 1 دورﺑﯿﻦ و ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮداری دورﺑﯿﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎت ﻣﻨﻮی 2 زﯾﺮ ﻣﻮارد ﺟﺰ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺖ ﯾﮑﺴﺎن ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﯾﮏ ارﺳﺎل ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ x را ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ﯾﺎ MMS ﻃﺮﯾﻖ از ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﺳﺎزد ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ اﻣﮑﺎن اﯾﻦ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ دﻗﺖ x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﻫﺎی...

Page 64: ...ﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮداری ﺷﺮوع ﺑﺮای 1 و ﺿﺒﻂ ﭘﯿﺎم ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺮوع ﻣﺤﺾ ﺑﻪ دﻫﯿﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻗﯽ زﻣﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﮔﯿﺮی از ﯾﺎ و ﮐﺮدن ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺮای 2 را ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ و ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ دادن ﭘﺎﯾﺎن ﺑﺮای 3 دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺗﻮﻗﻒ راﺳﺖ آﻟﺒﻮم ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ در ﺷﺪه ذﺧﯿﺮه ﺻﺪاﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﯿﻪ از ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ دﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ اراﺋﻪ را ...

Page 65: ...ﮔﺮ 2 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ T9 از ﻣﺘﻦ ﮐﺮدن وارد در ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ 3 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖ را زﯾﺮ ﻣﻮارد ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ 4 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ارﺳﺎل ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎم ارﺳﺎل x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ وارد را ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪه ﺷﻤﺎره 1 را ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﻫﺎی ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪه اﻓﺰودن ﺑﺮای 2 دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ را ﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎره 3 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ آدرس از ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ و دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ 4 ﻓﺸﺎر را ارﺳﺎل ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﮐﺮدن وارد دﻫﯿﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ اﻓﺰودن x ...

Page 66: ...ﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ اﺳﺎﻣﯽ را ﺧﻮد وﯾﺰﯾﺖ ﮐﺎرت ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ وﯾﺰﯾﺖ ﮐﺎرت ﮐﻨﯿﺪ درج ﭘﯿﺎم در در ﻫﺎ ﭘﯿﺎم ﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﯾﺲ ﭘﯿﺶ در ذﺧﯿﺮه x ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ ذﺧﯿﺮه ﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﯾﺲ ﭘﯿﺶ را زﺑﺎن T9 ورودی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮای T9 زﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎی x ﻧﯿﺰ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش T9 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎل را T9 ورودی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ واژه در ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ درج ﺑﺮای ﺟﺪﯾﺪ T9 ﮐﻠﻤﻪ x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺟﺪﯾﺪ T9 واژه ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺣﯿﻦ در ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﮐﺮدن ﭘﺎﮎ x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﭘﺎﮎ را ﻣﺘﻦ SMS ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺧﺮوج ﭘﯿﺎ...

Page 67: ...ﻳﻨﻪ ای رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎم ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻪ ارﺳﺎل x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ارﺳﺎل ﮐﻨﻨﺪه درﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﭼﻨﺪﯾﻦ ﺑﻪ را ارﺳﺎل ﻧﯿﺰ و ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﻨﺪی اوﻟﻮﯾﺖ را ﺧﻮد ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎم ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﻣﻮﮐﻮل ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻪ را آﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻧﻤﺎد ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ اﻓﺰودن x ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺻﺪای ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺻﺪا و وﯾﺰﯾﺖ ﮐﺎرت ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣﺘﻦ اﻟﮕﻮی ﺟﺪﯾﺪ اﺳﻼﯾﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ را ﻏﯿﺮه ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ در ﺧﻮدﮐﺎر ﻃﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﭘﯿﺎم ﻫﻤﻪ x از ﭘﺲ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ذﺧﯿﺮه ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ارﺳﺎل ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺶ...

Page 68: ...در ﻋﻼوه ﺑﻪ ﮐﺸﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل را ﮐﻠﯿﺪی ﻫﯿﭻ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﯿﺎم ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ 10 ﺣﺪود از ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻨﻮﯾﺴﯿﺪ را 3 1 5 ﻣﻨﻮ اﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮑﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ اﺷﺘﺮاﮎ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ اﺑﺘﺪا اﯾﻤﯿﻞ درﯾﺎﻓﺖ ارﺳﺎل ﺑﺮای ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﯾﺠﺎد اﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ و ﮐﺮده وارد را ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع 1 دﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ اﯾﻤﯿﻠﯽ ﭘﯿﺎم ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ از ﺑﻌﺪ 2 دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ زﯾﺮ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﭘﯿﺪا در را اﯾﻤﯿﻞ آدرس 20 ﺣﺪاﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ 3 وارد روﻧﻮﺷﺖ ﮔ...

Page 69: ... اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺟﺪﯾﺪ T9 واژه ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺣﯿﻦ در ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﮐﺮدن ﭘﺎﮎ x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﭘﺎﮎ را ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﯿﺎم را ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ اﯾﻦ ﭘﯿﺎم ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺣﯿﻦ در اﮔﺮ ﺧﺮوج x ﭘﯿﺎم ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ از ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﯾﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ و ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﺧﺎرج ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺸﺪه ذﺧﯿﺮه اﯾﺪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻣﯽ x اﯾﻤﯿﻞ اﺷﺘﺮاﮎ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮای اﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ذﺧﯿﺮه ﭘﯿﺎم 40 ﺣﺪاﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ اﺷﺘﺮاﮎ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺑﺮای ﭘﯿﺎم 200 ً ﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ورودی ﺻﻨﺪوق ﭘﻮﺷﻪ در در ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ذﺧﯿﺮه ﭘﯿﺎم 20 از ﺑﯿﺶ...

Page 70: ...ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ورودی اﻃﻼﻋﺎت داده ﻫﺸﺪار ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺎم درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ذﺧﻴﺮه درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺻﻨﺪوق در ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺎم اﻳﻦ ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﮐﺎرت ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﺑﺮای ﻓﻀﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﮔﺮ از را ﮐﺎرت ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎم ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ دﻫﺪ ﻧﺸﺎن را ﺑﺮای ﻓﻀﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺬف درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﻫﺮ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ دﻫﺪ ﻧﺸﺎن را ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﺎم و ﻫﺎ رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺎم ﺣﺬف ﺑﺎ را ذﺧﻴﺮه ﻣﮑﺎن دﻫﻴﺪ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﺎرت ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺎم ﭘﻴﺎم ﮐﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ اﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎرت ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺎم اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه ذﺧﻴﺮه...

Page 71: ... ﭘﯿﺎم اﻧﺪازه و ﭘﯿﺎم ﻧﻮع ﭘﯿﺎم زﻣﺎن و ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﭘﯿﺎم اﻧﺘﺨﺎب از ﺑﻌﺪ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺣﺬف x ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺣﺬف ﺧﻮاﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺣﺬف را ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎم ﺷﺪه ﺧﻮاﻧﺪه ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎم ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺣﺬف x ﺣﺬف را ﺷﺪه ﺧﻮاﻧﺪه ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎم ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺣﺬف را ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬف x ﮐﻨﻴﺪ 3 5 3 5 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ اﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮑﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺑﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ اﯾﻦ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﺎ اﯾﻤﯿﻠﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎم و ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺧﻮد دﺳﺖ دور ﭘﺴﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪن وارد...

Page 72: ... ﮐﻪ ﺣﺬف را ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎم ﺗﺎ دﻫﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ در ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬف x ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺬف را 5 5 5 5 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﭘﻴﺎم ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ اﻳﻦ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را ارﺳﺎل ﺑﻮدن ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻳﺎ ارﺳﺎل ارﺳﺎل ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎم ﭘﻴﺎم ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ارﺳﺎل از ﭘﺲ ﻳﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را ﭘﻴﺎم ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه x ﭘﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ارﺳﺎل را ﭘﻴﺎم ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ارﺳﺎل x اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ارﺳﺎل ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎم ﭘﻴﺎم ارﺳﺎل از ﻳﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ را ...

Page 73: ...ا ﻫﺸﺪار ﺷﻤﺎ و ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎت ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ دﻫﻨﺪه اراﺋﻪ ﺑﺎ را ﺧﺪﻣﺎت اﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮرﺳﯽ ﺧﻮد ﺷﺒﮑﻪ 8 5 8 5 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﭘﯿﺎم دارد ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺷﺘﺮاﮎ و ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎم اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎم اﻳﻦ ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ ارﺳﺎل GSM ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻮا و آب ﮔﺰارش ﻗﺒﻴﻞ از اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺎم ﻗﻴﻤﺖ و ﻫﺎ داروﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﮐﺴﯽ ﺗﺮاﻓﻴﮏ اﺧﺒﺎر ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺳﻬﺎم ﺧﺎص ﺷﻤﺎره اﮔﺮ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ دارد ﺷﻤﺎره ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮع ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ و...

Page 74: ... ﺗﺎ ﭘﻴﺎم 2 ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داده ﻧﺸﺎن 2 8 5 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎت دارد ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺷﺘﺮاﮎ و ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه x اﻳﺪ ﮐﺮده اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻪ را اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﭘﻴﺎم دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎم ﻣﻘﻮﻟﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ اﻳﺪ ﮐﺮده اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻪ را اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺬف ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻟﻴﺴﺖ x اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻓﻌﺎل ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ از را ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎم را اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺷﻤﺎره ﯾﮏ اﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ آن از ارﺳﺎﻟﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎم ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ...

Page 75: ...ﺎﯾﺶ x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ از ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب اﻟﮕﻮﯾﯽ ﭘﯿﺎم وﯾﺮاﯾﺶ x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ وﯾﺮاﯾﺶ را ﻣﺘﻦ اﻟﮕﻮی ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ از ارﺳﺎل x اﻟﮕﻮی ﭘﯿﺎم ارﺳﺎل ﺑﺮای اﯾﻦ از ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﯿﺎم ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده SMS ﻃﺮﯾﻖ از ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ارﺳﺎل ﺑﺮای اﯾﻦ از ای ﭼﻨﺪرﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎم MMS ﻃﺮﯾﻖ از ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب اﻟﮕﻮی ﭘﯿﺎم ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ارﺳﺎل ﺑﺮای اﯾﻦ از اﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮑﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ اﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ از ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب اﻟﮕﻮﯾﯽ ﭘﯿﺎم ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺬف را اﻟﮕﻮ ﺣﺬف x اﻟﮕﻮی ﯾﮏ اﯾﺠﺎد ﺑﺮای اﯾﻦ از ﺟﺪﯾﺪ اﻟﮕﻮی...

Page 76: ...ﺮاﯾﺶ x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺼﺤﯿﺢ را ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ای رﺳﺎﻧﻪ زﻣﺎن ﻣﺪت ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ اﺳﻼﯾﺪ زﻣﺎن ﻣﺪت x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ را ای ﭼﻨﺪرﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﯿﺎم اﺳﻼﯾﺪ را زﺑﺎن T9 ورودی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮای T9 زﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎی x ﻧﯿﺰ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش T9 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎل را T9 ورودی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ واژه در ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ درج ﺑﺮای ﺟﺪﯾﺪ T9 ﮐﻠﻤﻪ x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺟﺪﯾﺪ T9 واژه ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎزﮔﺮدﯾﺪ ﭘﯿﺎم ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﺮوج x 0 5 0 5 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت 1 0 5 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﭘﯿﻐﺎم اﻧﻮاع ...

Page 77: ...ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎت ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ x دﻫﯿﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم را GSM GPRS ﻧﻈﯿﺮ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ 2 0 5 ﻣﻨﻮ ای رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﯿﺎم اﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻨﻮ اﻳﻦ وﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع x را ای رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎم ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ وارد ﻣﺪت ﭘﯿﺎم ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎن اﺳﻼﯾﺪ زﻣﺎن ﻣﺪت x دﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ را ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺮ زﻣﺎن ﭘﻴﻐﺎم اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ x ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ را ﺧﻮد اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ اﺟﺎزه ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ اﻳﻦ اﻋﺘﺒﺎر ﻣﺪت x ﻣﺮﮐﺰ در ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﮐﻪ را زﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺪت ﺗﺎ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ...

Page 78: ...ﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ درﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﮑﺎر را ﭘﻴﺎم ﺳﺮور ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ x درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ای رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﯿﺎم ﺳﺮور از را URL ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺎز اﻧﻮاع x ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺑﺎزرﮔﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻐﺎت ﺿﺮوری اﻃﻼﻋﺎت اﻃﻼﻋﺎت 3 0 5 ﻣﻨﻮ اﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮑﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ اﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮑﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ اﺷﺘﺮاﮎ x ﺑﻪ ﮐﻪ دﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ اﻣﮑﺎن ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ اﯾﻦ ﭘﺴﺖ اﺷﺘﺮاﮎ ﮐﺮدن اﺿﺎﻓﻪ و ﺣﺬف وﯾﺮاﯾﺶ ﺑﭙﺮدازﯾﺪ اﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮑﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را اﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻓﺮض ﭘﯿﺶ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ وﯾﺮاﯾﺶ اﺷﺘﺮاﮎ ﻧﺎم اﺷﺘﺮاﮎ ﻧﺎم ...

Page 79: ... درﯾﺎﻓﺖ اﻧﺪازه ﺣﺪاﮐﺜﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ درﯾﺎﻓﺖ اﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ای اﻧﺪازه ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را ﭘﯿﺎم ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﺑﺮای ﺳﺮور در ذﺧﯿﺮه ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺑﻠﻪ ﺳﺮور در ذﯾﻞ ﺧﻮد اﻣﻀﺎی درج ﺑﺮای اﻣﻀﺎ درج اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺑﻠﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ اﯾﻤﯿﻠﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺎم ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ اﯾﻤﯿﻠﯽ آدرس ﭘﺎﺳﺦ اﯾﻤﯿﻞ آدرس ﮐﻨﯿﺪ درﯾﺎﻓﺖ را ﭘﺎﺳﺦ آن ﻃﺮﯾﻖ از ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﭘﻮرت ﺷﻤﺎره وﯾﺮاﯾﺶ ورودی ﭘﻮرت ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﺎزد ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ اﻣﮑﺎن را POP3 ﭘﻮرت ﺷﻤﺎره وﯾﺮاﯾﺶ ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ ﭘﻮرت ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﺎزد ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ اﻣ...

Page 80: ...ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺷﺪه ذﺧﯿﺮه ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ در ﮐﻪ دارد وﺟﻮد ﻓﺮض ﭘﯿﺶ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻧﺎم ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ اﻣﮑﺎن اﻣﻀﺎ x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﯾﺠﺎد ﺧﻮد ﺑﺮای اﻣﻀﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ 4 0 5 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎره ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ را ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ اﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ درﻳﺎﻓﺖ را ﺷﺪه ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎده ﺻﺪای ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻴﺮﺳﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻳﮏ وﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داده ﻧﺸﺎن ﺻﻔﺤﻪ روی 5 0 5 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺪه ارﺳﺎل ﭘﯿﺎم ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻃﻮری ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ را ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ و ﮐﻨﻴﺪ درﻳﺎﻓﺖ را ﭘﻴﻐﺎم 6...

Page 81: ...ﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺗﺎن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ درﻳﺎﻓﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت زد ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ زﻧﮓ ﺻﻮرت در ﺣﺘﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ اﻳﻦ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ زﻧﮓ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت درﻳﺎﻓﺖ زد ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ زﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ x ﻣﻮرد زﺑﺎن ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺧﻮد ﻧﻈﺮ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب زﺑﺎن ﺑﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﭘﯿﺎم ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داده ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺷﺪه ...

Page 82: ... ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ زﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ اﻓﻘﯽ زﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ و اﻓﻘﯽ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮان ﻣﯽ را ﻓﻌﻠﯽ داد ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ زﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮان ﻣﯽ را ﻧﻤﻮد ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ از ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﯾﮏ ارﺳﺎل ﻃﺮﯾﻖ از ارﺳﺎل x را اﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮏ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث MMS ﺳﺎزد ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ اﻣﮑﺎن ﭘﺮوﻧﺪه x ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﺎم ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﺎم ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ را ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺿﻤﯿﻤﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ و دﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ اﻳﻦ از x ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑ...

Page 83: ...ﺎت اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺣﯿﻦ در ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﯿﺎورﯾﺪ ﺑﯿﺮون ﮔﻮﺷﯽ از را ﺧﺎرﺟﯽ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﺪ آﺳﯿﺐ ً ا ﺷﺪﯾﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ دﻫﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ را ﻓﺎﻳﻞ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﮐﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ اﮐﺜﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث ﻃﺮﯾﻖ از ﭼﺎپ x WAP ﻃﺮﯾﻖ از ﯾﺎ و ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ دورﺑﯿﻦ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ از ﺑﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث ﻃﺮﯾﻖ از ﺗﻮان ﻣﯽ را اﯾﺪ ﮐﺮده درﯾﺎﻓﺖ داد اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ اﺳﻼﯾﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ x ﺻﻮرت ﺑﻪ را ﺷﺪه ذﺧﯿﺮه ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه اﺳﻼﯾﺪی اﯾﺠﺎد ﺟﺪﯾﺪی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺳﺮی ﯾﮏ ﺣﺬف ﭼ...

Page 84: ...ﻢ زﻧﮓ آﻫﻨﮓ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﭘﺮوﻧﺪه اﻃﻼﻋﺎت x 3 6 3 6 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ در MP4 3GP ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ رﺳﺎﻧﻪ در ای رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺷﺪه ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﻮع ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ داده ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﻫﺎی ﮐﺪﮎ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ 3gp ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﮐﺪ AMR ﺻﻮﺗﯽ وﮐﺪﮎ MPEG4 و h 236 اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه ﮔﺬاری اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ x ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی از ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ را ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺬف ﺣﺬف x ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ارﺳﺎل ﻃﺮﯾﻖ...

Page 85: ...ﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﯿﺎورﯾﺪ ﺑﯿﺮون ﮔﻮﺷﯽ از را ﺧﺎرﺟﯽ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﺪ آﺳﯿﺐ ً ا ﺷﺪﯾﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ در ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺧﺎرﺟﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ای رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ دﻫﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ را ﻓﺎﻳﻞ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت اﻃﻼﻋﺎت اﯾﺠﺎد ﺟﺪﯾﺪی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ x ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺳﺮی ﯾﮏ ﺣﺬف ﭼﻨﺪﺗﺎﯾﯽ ﺣﺬف x ﺳﺎزد ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ اﻣﮑﺎن را ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺣﺬف ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬف x 4 6 4 6 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ اﺳﻨﺎد txt ppt ﻗﺒﯿﻞ از ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﻮع ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻨﻮ اﯾﻦ ﺳﺎزد ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ اﻣﮑﺎن ...

Page 86: ...ﯾﺮ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ USB ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺧﻮاﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه داﺧﻠﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ در را ﺳﺎﯾﺮﯾﻦ و ﻫﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ ﮐﺮد در ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻫﺎی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را ﺧﺎرﺟﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ 6 6 6 6 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ و ﺑﺎزﻳﻬﺎ ﺷﺪه ﻧﺼﺐ ﺟﺎوا ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ اﻳﻦ در ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ را ﺧﻮد ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺬف ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ را ﺷﺪه ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ را اﺗﺼﺎل 7 6 7 6 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺧﺎرﺟﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ اﺳﻨﺎد ﻫﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ ...

Page 87: ...ﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ اﻧﺒﻮه ذﺧﯿﺮه ﮐﺎرﮐﺮد x ﻏﯿﺮ وﺿﻌﯿﺖ در ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻗﺮار ﻓﻌﺎل ﻗﻄﻊ را ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ درﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺣﯿﻦ در x اﺑﺘﺪا ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ درﯾﺎﻓﺖ از ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ و اﯾﻤﻦ ﻗﻄﻊ روی راﯾﺎﻧﻪ در ﺑﺎﯾﺪ را ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﭙﺲ و ﮐﻠﯿﮏ اﻓﺰار ﺳﺨﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ دﯾﺴﮏ روی را ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ x ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺟﺪاﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ روی را اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺣﺎل در ﭘﯿﻐﺎم آن ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﺑﻪ اﯾﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه و ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ اﻧﺒﻮه ذﺧﯿﺮه ﮐﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺳﺖ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺣﺎل در اﻃﻼ...

Page 88: ...ﺖ در 2 ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ و رﻓﺘﻪ ﮐﺮدن ﻓﻌﺎل ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﭼﭗ دﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﮐﺮدن ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﭙﺲ 3 x2 x 7 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﺮوﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ در ﻣﻮردﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر از ﭘﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﻪ را ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎز ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ دﻟﺨﻮاه را ورودی ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺸﺪار ﻧﻮع ورودی زﻧﮓ ﻧﻮع x ﮐﻨﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻟﻴﺴﺖ از را ﺧﻮد دﻟﺨﻮاه زﻧﮓ زﻧﮓ ﺻﺪای x ﮐﻨﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨ...

Page 89: ...ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮه ﺻﺪای ﻣﻴﺰان ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد ﺻﺪای x ﮐﻨﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺻﺪای ﻣﻴﺰان ﺧﺎﻣﻮش روﺷﻦ ﺻﺪای ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ x ﮐﺮدن ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻳﺎ روﺷﻦ زﻣﺎن را زﻧﮓ آﻫﻨﮓ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ اﻣﮑﺎن ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻧﺎم ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ x ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ...

Page 90: ...ه ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻦ از ﺑﻌﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﭘﯿﺎم x ای رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﯿﺎم ﯾﮏ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻤﺎره ﺑﺮای را اﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮏ ﭘﺴﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ارﺳﺎل دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ از ارﺳﺎل x ای رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﯿﺎم ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﯿﺎم ﻃﺮﯾﻖ از را ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ارﺳﺎل اﻟﮑﺘﺮوﻧﯿﮏ ﭘﺴﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث ﺣﺬف را دﻟﺨﻮاﻫﯽ ورودی ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺬف x ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ذﺧﯿﺮه ﻣﺤﻞ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب از ﺑﻌﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ اﻓﺰودن x ﺑﻪ را اﺳﻤﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮐﺎرت ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺳﺮی ﯾﮏ ﺣﺬف ﭼﻨﺪﺗﺎ...

Page 91: ...ﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ 1 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺟﺪﯾﺪ اﻓﺰودن ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻧﺎم ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮدن وارد 2 ﯾﮏ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺳﭙﺲ دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را 3 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ وارد را ﺷﻤﺎره ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﮔﺮوه ﻣﯿﺘﻮاﻧﯿﺪ r q ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺑﺎ 4 ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺧﻮد ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ 5 ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ و زﻧﮓ آﻫﻨﮓ ﯾﮏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ورودی ﺑﺮای را 3 8 3 8 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎره را ﺗﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی از ﻳﻚ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ دﻫﻴﺪ اﺧﺘﺼﺎص ﻧﺎم ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ورودی ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ...

Page 92: ...ﺎل ﭘﻴﺎم ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس 4 8 4 8 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺮوه ﺗﻬﯿﻪ ﮔﺮوه ﻫﺮ اﻋﻀﺎی از ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ آﻧﻬﺎ از ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ دارد وﺟﻮد ﮔﺮوه 7 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻬﯿﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮔﺮوه اﻋﻀﺎی اﻋﻀﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه x ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻧﺸﺎن را اﻳﺪ ﮐﺮده اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔﺮوه زﻧﮓ x ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﯽ زﻧﮓ ﮔﺮوه اﻋﻀﺎی ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺮای ﺑﺴﺎزﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب اﻣﮑﺎن ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔﺮوه ﻧﻤﺎد x دارﻳﺪ را ﮔﺮوه ﻫﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻧﺸﺎن زﻳﺎد ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ را ﮔﺮوه اﻋﻀﺎی ﻋﻀﻮ اﻓﺰودن x ﮐﻨ...

Page 93: ...اﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺎرت ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ x دﻫﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﮐﺎرت ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ 6 8 6 8 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬف را ﮔﻮﺷﯽ و ﮐﺎرت ﺳﻴﻢ اﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺬف 7 8 7 8 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت دﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را اﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ 1 ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ رﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﻪ 2 ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻓﺮض ﭘﯿﺶ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ x در را ﻓﺮض ﭘﯿﺶ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺎرت ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﭙﺮس ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﻫﺎی وﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ x ﺳﭙﺲ رﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را اﻧ...

Page 94: ...واﺑﺴﺘﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎره x روی را ﺧﻮد ﺷﻤﺎره ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﮏ و ﻧﻤﻮده ذﺧﻴﺮه ﮐﺎرت ﺳﻴﻢ وﻳﺰﻳﺖ ﮐﺎرت x وﯾﺰﯾﺖ ﮐﺎرت ﯾﮏ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ اﯾﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮد ﺑﺮای ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎره و ﻧﺎم ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ اﯾﺠﺎد ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ وﯾﺰﯾﺖ ﮐﺎرت ﯾﮏ اﯾﺠﺎد ﺑﺮای و دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ وارد ﻓﯿﻠﺪﻫﺎ در را ﻻزم اﻃﻼﻋﺎت وﯾﺮاﯾﺶ را وﯾﺰﯾﺖ ﮐﺎرت ﯾﮏ ﺧﻮاﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ارﺳﺎل ﯾﺎ ﺣﺬف ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ...

Page 95: ...ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ را ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ YYYY DD MM DD MM YYYY ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ MM DD YYYY ﺳﺎل Y ﻣﺎه M روز D 3 1 9 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ وارد ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ را ﺟﺎری ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﻮﻧﯽ وﻗﺖ 4 1 9 ﻣﻨﻮ زﻣﺎن ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 12 و ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 24 ﺑﻴﻦ را ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ 5 1 9 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ داﺧﻞ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ را ﺟﺎری ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﻮﻧﯽ زﻣﺎن وﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ 2 9 2 9 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ زﺑﺎن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در را ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ زﺑﺎن ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ زﺑﺎن ورودی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ دﻫ...

Page 96: ... ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ را LCD روﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ 100 80 60 40 4 3 9 ﻣﻨﻮ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎی روﺷﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺎ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ و ﺟﻬﺘﻪ ﭼﻬﺎر ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻧﺸﺎن ﻓﻌﺎل ﻏﻴﺮ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه وﺳﻂ در ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮی ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ دﻟﺨﻮاه ﻣﻮارد ﭘﯿﺎم ارﺳﺎل ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎس 5 3 9 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺳﺒﮏ را ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ و ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺳﺎزد ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮای اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ را ﻣﻨﻮ رﻧﮓ 6 3 9 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺳﺒﮏ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮای...

Page 97: ... ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 4 9 4 9 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ 1 4 9 ﻣﻨﻮ Bluetooth Bluetooth QD ID B012427 و ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺮﻗﺮاری اﻣﮑﺎن Bluetooth ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎﻳﯽ و ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ را ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﯽ اﻳﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺠﺎورت در ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ داﺧﻠﯽ Bluetooth اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﻴﻬﺎ دﻳﮕﺮ و آن ﺑﻴﻦ ارﺗﺒﺎط ﮐﻪ اﺳﺖ ﺳﺎزد ﻣﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ را ﻏﻴﺮه و ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ Bluetooth دﺳﺘﮕﺎه از را ای داده وﻗﺘﯽ x ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺮدﯾﺪ درﯾﺎﻓﺖ دﯾﮕﺮ ...

Page 98: ...ﯾﺮ اﻣﮑﺎن را ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث اﺑﺰارﻫﺎی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮐﻪ اﺑﺰاری اﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ آن ﺑﺎ را ﺧﻮد ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮاﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ راﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮرد اﺑﺰار ﻃﺮف ﺑﻪ دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ و ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﺳﮑﺮول ﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ از ﺳﭙﺲ دﻫﯿﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻋﺒﻮر ﮐﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ وارد را ﻋﺒﻮر ﮐﺪ ﯾﮏ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻮرد ﺧﻮاﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺪی ﻫﺮ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻋﺒﻮر ﮐﺪ از ﺑﺎﯾﺪ اﺑﺰار دو ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮای ﺑﺎ...

Page 99: ... ﻫﻤﻪ اﻣﮑﺎن را ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎزد ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﯾﺮ را Bluetooth دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺬف ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺣﺬف ﻫﺎی دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬف ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺣﺬف را Bluetooth ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت x ﻧﺸﺎن اﯾﻦ ﻣﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ رؤﻳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺑﺮای ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ آﯾﺎ ﮐﻪ دﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻮد ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ رؤﯾﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث اﺑﺰارﻫﺎی دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻧﺎم ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﺎم ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﺎم ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ را Bluetooth اﺳﺖ LG KE770 ﻓﺮض ﺧﻮد ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث اﺑﺰار آدرس ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﻦ آدرس ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ...

Page 100: ...ه x ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮد ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪه دﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ در ﺛﺒﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻼش از ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ در ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ از ﻣﺬﮐﻮر ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﻮد ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ً ﻼ ﻗﺒ و ﺷﺪه ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﮔﺮدد ﻣﯽ 2 2 4 9 ﻣﻨﻮ GPRS ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﺮ را GPRS ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺎی وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﮐﺮدن روﺷﻦ x ﮐﻪ زﻣﺎن ﻫﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻣﻨﻮ اﯾﻦ اﮔﺮ ﺧﻮدﮐﺎر ﻃﻮر ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ روﺷﻦ را ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﺎ ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ ﺛﺒﺖ G...

Page 101: ...ودی ﺑﻪ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺳﺮور ورودی ﻧﻪ و ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺳﺮور ﻋﺒﻮر رﻣﺰ ﺷﻤﺎ از ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ WAP ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻋﺒﻮر رﻣﺰ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻮع ﺗﻤﺎس ﻧﻮع ISDN دﯾﺠﯿﺘﺎل ﯾﺎ آﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ای داده ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ 14400 ﯾﺎ 9600 ﺷﻤﺎ دارد اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺷﺪه ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ زﻣﺎن در ﺑﺎﯾﺪ درﻧﮓ زﻣﺎن اﮔﺮ آن ﺑﻪ ورود از ﭘﺲ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ داﺧﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺪه ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮه ﯾﺎ وارد اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ آﻣﺎده WAP ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺳﺮوﯾﺲ ﺑﻮد DNS ﺳﺮور IP آدرس اﺻﻠﯽ ﺳﺮور ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ وارد ر...

Page 102: ...اﺗﺼﺎل و ای داده ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﻫﺎی وﺿﻌﯿﺖ از ﯾﮑﯽ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را اﻧﺒﻮه ذﺧﯿﺮه ﺧﺮوج روی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده اﺗﻤﺎم از ﺑﻌﺪ دﻫﯿﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم را زﯾﺮ ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ و ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط روی ﮐﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻻزم ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ از ﻗﺒﻞ x ﺻﻮرت اﯾﻦ ﻏﯿﺮ در ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺧﺮوج ﺗﻀﻤﯿﻦ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺳﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺮدد ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ اﻋﻼن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ روی 1 ﺑﯿﺮون را آن ﯾﺎ و ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ را اﻓﺰار ﺳﺨﺖ ﺑﯿﺎورﯾﺪ روی و اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را USB اﻧﺒﻮه ذﺧﯿﺮه اﺑﺰار 2 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﻧﺒﻮه...

Page 103: ...ﺪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل را ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻬﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺸﻐﻮل اﮔﺮ x را ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﻣﺸﻐﻮل ﺻﻮرت در ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻋﺪم ﺻﻮرت در x اﻧﺘﻘﺎل را ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ درﺻﻮرﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ دﺳﺘﺮس در اﮔﺮ x دﺳﺘﺮس در ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺗﻠﻔﻦ وﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل را ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ داده ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺗﻤﺎم x ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮط و ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺪون ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮی ﻓﺎﮐﺲ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی x ﻓﮑﺲ ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮط و ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺪون ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣﻮارد ﺗ...

Page 104: ... ﻣﯽ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎل را ﺗﻤﺎس اﻧﺘﻘﺎل وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ را ﺗﻤﺎس اﻧﺘﻘﺎل وﺿﻊ 2 5 9 ﻣﻨﻮ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪی ﻫﺮ x ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻣﻨﻮ اﻳﻦ اﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ را ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﮐﻠﻴﺪ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎی ﺑﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﻮاب ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎدن ﻛﻠﯿﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ x ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻣﻨﻮ اﯾﻦ اﮔﺮ ﺟﻮاب را ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﯿﺘﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎدن ﮐﻠﯿﺪ دﻫﯿﺪ 3 5 9 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ را ﺷﻤﺎره اﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط اﺷﺘﺮاﮎ و ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ x ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻣﻨﻮ اﻳﻦ اﮔ...

Page 105: ...را ﺷﺪن ﻓﻌﺎل اﮔﺮ ﮐﺮد ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ درﻳﺎﻓﺖ را ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻟﻐﻮ x را وارده ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻟﻐﻮ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ x ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻧﺸﺎن را ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ 5 5 9 ﻣﻨﻮ دﻗﯿﻘﻪ ﯾﺎداور ﻣﺪت ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﻴﻦ ﮐﺮدﻳﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را روﺷﻦ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن در را ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺻﺪای 6 5 9 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺧﻮدﮐﺎر ﻣﺠﺪد ﮔﯿﺮ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻓﻌﺎل x ﻋﺪم ﻣﻮارد در ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل را ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد اﻳﻦ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺮای ﺧﻮدﮐﺎر ﻃﻮر ...

Page 106: ...دن روﺷﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻣﻨﻮ اﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﻮدن ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺮدن وارد ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺷﺪ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎی اﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﻣﻌﻴﺎرﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮی در 1 را ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ و ﮐﻨﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻓﺸﺎردﻫﻴﺪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎل ﻓﻌﺎل ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ 2 ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ را ﺷﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ وﺿﻊ ﺑﺨﻮاﻫﻴﺪ اﮔﺮ 3 ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ روﺷﻦ را ﺗﻠﻔﻦ زﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ وارد را ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ وارد ﻏﻠﻂ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺑﺎر 3 از ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ اﮔﺮ 4 ﺑﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻗﻔﻞ ﭘﻴﻦ اﮔﺮ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ داﺷﺖ ﻧﻴﺎزﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﺪ PUK اﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ وارد ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧ...

Page 107: ...اﺳﺘﻔﺎده اﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﮐﺪ از ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﺪن روﺷﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روی را ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻮرﺗﯽ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش را ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺮوﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﺮده ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ وارد را اﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﮐﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آن ﮐﺮدن روﺷﻦ ﺑﺮای ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻋﻮض ﺳﻴﻢ وﻗﺘﯽ روی را ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ اﮔﺮ ﮐﺮد ﺻﻮرت در ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮد ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎ را اﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﮐﺪ ﮐﺎرت ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ 4 6 9 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻤﺎس ﮐﺮدن ﻣﺤﺪود ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی از ﻣﻌﻴﻨﯽ ﮔﺮوه درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ اﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ رﻣﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﮕﺮدد ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ر...

Page 108: ...ﻳﺲ ﻣﺮزی ﺑﺮون ﺳﻔﺮﻫﺎی ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻤﺎس ﻟﻐﻮ x ﮐﻨﺪ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ را ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ رﻣﺰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ x ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﺪ را ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ رﻣﺰ دﻫﺪ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻴﮕﺮدد ﻓﻌﺎل ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ ﻟﻐﻮ را ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ اﻧﺪ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻤﻨﻮع ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ 5 6 9 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﻤﺎره ﺷﻤﺎره ﮐﺎرت ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎره ﺑﻪ را ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺪود ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴ...

Page 109: ...ﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﮐﺪ 2 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ را آﻧﻬﺎ و 7 9 7 9 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﭘﺮواز ﺣﺎﻟﺖ از ﻓﻘﻂ ﮐﻪ دﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ اﻣﮑﺎن ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ اﯾﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﻪ ﻧﯿﺎز ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻮاﻗﻌﯽ ﺑﺮای و ﻧﺪارد ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ از ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﮑﺎن ﯾﺎ ﻫﻮاﭘﯿﻤﺎ در ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻪ اﺳﺖ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻨﻮع ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎد دﻫﯿﺪ ﻗﺮار روﺷﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ در را ﭘﺮواز وﺿﻌﯿﺖ اﮔﺮ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎل ﻧﻤﺎد ﺟﺎی ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ روی آن ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داده ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺻﻮرت اﯾﻦ در ر...

Page 110: ...9 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺮض ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ را ﮐﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮض ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﺠﺪد ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺮای ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎزﻳﺎﺑﯽ دارﯾﺪ ﻧﯿﺎز اﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﮐﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﮐﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ 0 9 0 9 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻮرد ﻓﻀﺎی ﻣﻘﺪار و آزاد ﻓﻀﺎی ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ داﺧﻠﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ذﺧﯿﺮه ﻣﮑﺎن ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮرﺳﯽ را ﺧﺎرﺟﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ و ای رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﯿﺎم ﺑﺮوﯾﺪ ذﺧﯿﺮه ﻣﮑﺎن ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ...

Page 111: ... ﻣﯽ ﺷﺎرژر اﻳﻦ از ﺧﺎرج ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮاﻗﻌﯽ در ﮐﺎر ﻣﺤﻞ وﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺰل از ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﮐﺎﺑﻞ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺗﺒﺎدل ﺟﻬﺖ راﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ را ﺧﻮد ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺧﻮد ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را آﻧﻬﺎ از ﮐﺪام ﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺎس ﺑﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺮای ﻣﺘﻌﺪدی ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮازم ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ...

Page 112: ...x ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ اﺻﻠﯽ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮازم از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻋﺪم x اﻋﺘﺒﺎر درﺟﻪ از را ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﻧﻮاﺣﯽ در اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮازم x ﮐﺴﺐ ﺑﺮای ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﯾﺎ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ً ﺎ ﻟﻄﻔ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺧﻮد ﻣﺤﻞ در ﻣﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﻨﯽ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﻨﯽ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ...

Page 113: ...1 12 ﻓﻨﯽ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﻨﯽ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﻨﯽ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﻨﯽ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ KE770 ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﻧﺎم GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده دﻣﺎی ﻣﺤﺪودﯾﺖ 55 C ﻋﺎدی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ در 10 C ﺷﺎرژ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ...

Page 114: ......

Page 115: ...KE770 User Guide English ...

Page 116: ...ing the memory card General functions 23 Making and answering calls Entering Text 25 Changing the text input mode 26 Contacts 29 Selecting functions and options 30 In call menu 31 During a call Multiparty or conference calls 33 Menu Tree 35 Browser 38 Home 39 Bookmarks Go to URL History 40 Settings Network profile Cache 41 Cookies Security certificates Information Call history 42 All calls Missed ...

Page 117: ... New message Text Multimedia 61 Email 63 Inbox 64 Email box 65 Drafts 66 Outbox Sent 67 Listen to voice mail Info message Read 68 Topics Templates Text Multimedia 69 Settings 70 Text message Multimedia message Email 71 Voice mail number 73 Push message Info message My stuff 74 Images Sounds 75 Videos 76 Documents 77 Others Games Apps 78 External memory Profiles 80 General Activate Personalise Sile...

Page 118: ...t Time Brightness 87 Home screen shortcut Menu style Dialing style Standby text Network name Connectivity Bluetooth Network 90 USB connection mode 92 Call 93 Call divert Answer mode 94 Send my number 95 Call waiting Minute minder Auto redial 96 Send DTMF Security PIN code request Auto key lock 97 Phone lock Call barring Fixed dial number 98 Change codes 99 Flight mode Power Save 100 Reset default ...

Page 119: ...ogy Introduction Introduction 5 This user s guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage to or misuse of the phone Any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this user s guide could void your warranty for this equipment ...

Page 120: ...itterscarryrisksof interferencewithelectronicsin closeproximity Minorinterference mayaffectTVs radios PCs etc Batteriesshouldbedisposedofin accordancewithrelevant legislation Donotdismantlethephoneor battery Riskofexplosionifbatteryis replacedbyanincorrecttype Warning MobilePhonesmustbeswitched offatalltimesinaircrafts Donotholdthephoneinyourhand whiledriving Donotuseyourphonenearpetrol stations f...

Page 121: ...ds with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands v While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various LG phone models they are all designed to meet the relevant guidelines for exposure to radio waves v The SAR limit recommended by the International Commission on Non Ionizing Radiation Protection ICNIRP is 2W kg averaged over ten 10 gram ...

Page 122: ...n your phone There is a risk of this causing a fire v Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust v Do not keep the phone next to credit cards or transport tickets it can affect the information on the magnetic strips v Do not tap the screen with a sharp object as it may damage the phone v Do not expose the phone to liquid or moisture v Use accessories such as earphones and headsets with ca...

Page 123: ...ve full attention to driving v Use a hands free kit if available v Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require v RF energy may affect some electronic systems in your motor vehicle such as a car stereo or safety equipment v If your vehicle is equipped with an air bag do not obstruct it with installed or portable wireless equipment It can cause serio...

Page 124: ...spheres v Do not use the phone at a refueIling point Don t use near fuel or chemicals v Do not transport or store flammable gas liquid or explosives in the compartment of your vehicle which contains your mobile phone and accessories Inaircraft Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft v Turn off your mobile phone before boarding any aircraft v Do not use it on the ground without crew per...

Page 125: ...sassemble or short circuit the battery pack v Keep the metal contacts of the battery pack clean v Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance The battery pack may be recharged hundreds of times until it needs replacing v Recharge the battery if it has not been used for a long time to maximize usability v Do not expose the battery charger to direct sunlight or use it in hi...

Page 126: ...ls Activate Voice mail centre menu to Speed dials v In editing mode Enter numbers characters LCD v Top Signal strength battery level and various function v Bottom Soft key indications Earpiece Navigation key v In standby mode Briefly Message Briefly List of Address book Briefly List of Profiles Briefly List of Favourites v In menu scroll up down ...

Page 127: ...bottom of the display Confirm key Selects menu options and confirms actions Send key v Dial a phone number and answer a call v In standby mode shows recently dialled received and missed calls Clear key v Allows you to delete the characters entered or return you to the previous screen v End a call ...

Page 128: ...ing the maximum volume level is set to 3 Battery Charging Connector Cable connector and Ear jack Side camera key v Quick Access to Camera Mode MP3 hot key Activates the MP3 player mode Note v Pleas ensure phone is powered on and in idle mode before connecting the USB cable End key v Switch on off hold down v End or reject a call Holes for a carring strap ...

Page 129: ...Rear view KE770 features 15 Camera lens Flash SIM card socket Battery Memory card slot Battery latch Press this button to remove the battery cover Battery cover Battery terminals ...

Page 130: ... the two soft keys The screen displays several icons These are described below On ScreenIcons Icon Description Tells you the strength of the network signal Call is connected You can use EDGE service Shows that you are using a roaming service The alarm has been set and is on Tells you the status of the battery You have received a text message You have received a voice message Vibrate only menu in p...

Page 131: ...ed of 200Kb s depending on network availability Check with your operator for network coverage and service availability The quality of the conversation may change depending on network coverage When the signal strength is below 2 bars you may experience muting call drop and poor audio Please refer to this signal as an indicator for your calls When there are no bars that means that there is no networ...

Page 132: ...ur fingers and pull out the battery 2 Install the SIM card Insert and slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder Make sure that the SIM card is inserted properly and that the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards To remove the SIM card press down lightly and pull it in the reverse direction To insert the SIM card To remove the SIM card Note v v Removing the battery from the phone when...

Page 133: ...of the phone Push down the top of the battery until it snaps into place Place the battery cover to the phone as shown Note v The metal contact of the SIM card can be easily damaged by scratches Pay special attention to the SIM card while handling Follow the instructions supplied with the SIM card Installation 19 ...

Page 134: ...el adapter to the mains socket Use only the charger included in the box 4 The moving bars of battery icon will stop after charging is complete CAUTION Ifthebatteryiscompletely discharged thechargingdisplay willappearontheLCD approximately1to1 5minutesafter connectingTA Donotforcetheconnectorasthis maydamagethephoneand orthe traveladapter Insertthebatterypackcharger verticallytowallpoweroutlet Ifyo...

Page 135: ...the phone by pulling the connector not the cord WARNING Unplugthechargerduringlightning stormstoavoidelectricshockor fire Makesurethatnosharp edged items suchasanimalteethornails comeintocontactwiththebattery Thereisariskofthiscausingafire Installation 21 ...

Page 136: ...vingthememory card Carefully remove the memory card out of the Socket as shown in the figure below Note v Only use memory cards that have been approved by the manufacturer Some memory cards might not be compliant with the handset Note v The gold connectors must be face down and inserted first into the memory card slot Installation Installation 22 ...

Page 137: ...send key and the latest incoming outgoing and missed phone numbers will be displayed 2 Select the desired number by using the up down navigation keys 3 Press to call the number Making an international call 1 Press and hold the key for the international prefix The character automatically selects the international access code Generalfunctions General functions 23 Note We recommend that you should gr...

Page 138: ...me during a call use the side keys Press the up side key to increase and down side key to decrease the volume Answering a call When you receive a call the phone rings and the flashing phone icon appears on the screen If the caller can be identified the caller s phone number or name photo if saved in the phonebook is displayed 1 Press the key or the left soft key to answer an incoming call If the A...

Page 139: ...the phonebook writing a message creating a personal greeting The following text input methods are available in the phone T9 mode This mode lets you enter words with only one keystroke per letter Each key on the keypad has more than one letter The T9 mode automatically compares your keystrokes with an internal dictionary to determine the correct word thus requiring far fewer keystrokes than the tra...

Page 140: ...presses As you press each key the phone begins to display the characters that it thinks you are typing based on the built in dictionary You can also add new words in the dictionary As new words are added the word changes to reflect the most likely candidate from the dictionary You can turn the T9 mode on or off and change the T9 language by holding down the key 1 When you are in the T9 predictive ...

Page 141: ... by selecting T9 off 2 Enter the whole word before editing or deleting any keystrokes 3 Complete each word with a space by pressing the key To delete letters press Press and hold down to erase entire words Using the ABC mode Use the to keys to enter your text 1 Press the key labelled with the required letter v Once for the first letter v Twice for the second letter v And so on 2 To insert a space ...

Page 142: ...ing to the required digits before manually switching back to the appropriate text entry mode You can quickly switch from letters to numbers by pressing and holding down the key Using the Symbol Mode The Symbol Mode enables you to enter various symbols or special characters To enter a symbol press the key Use the navigation keys to scroll through the symbols and press the corresponding key and then...

Page 143: ...ers and their corresponding names in the memory of your SIM card In addition you can store up to 1000 numbers and names in the phone memory The SIM card and phone are both used in the same way in the Contacts menu General functions 29 ...

Page 144: ... context or the label on the bottom line of the screen just above each key indicates its current role Selectingfunctionsandoptions Selecting functions and options 30 Press the right soft key to access the available Contacts Press the left soft key to access the available menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Menu Contacts Contacts Contacts Contacts Co...

Page 145: ...led number into the phonebook during a call press the right soft key then select Add new Switching between two calls To switch between two calls press the left soft key then select Swap Answering an incoming call To answer an incoming call when the handset is ringing simply press the key The handset is also able to warn you of an incoming call while you are already on a call A tone sounds in the e...

Page 146: ...sing the key During a call you can reject an incoming call by pressing the Right soft key Reject can accept the call by pressing Left Soft Key Answer Left soft key Option Selecting the Conference Reject by pressing the key Muting the microphone You can mute the microphone during a call by pressing the RSK Mute key The handset can be unmuted by selecting RSK Unmute When the handset is muted the cal...

Page 147: ...imum callers in a multiparty call are five Once started you are in control of the multiparty call and only you can add callers to the multiparty call Making a second call You can make a second call while currently on a call Enter the second number and press the key When the second call is connected the first call is automatically placed on hold You can swap between calls by pressing the left soft ...

Page 148: ...all To have a private call with one caller from a conference call display the number of the caller you wish to talk to on the screen then press the left soft key Select the Conference Private to put all the other callers on hold Ending a conference call The currently displayed caller from a conference call can be disconnected by pressing the key To end a conference call press the left soft key the...

Page 149: ...e where you can find the feature description You can go to the desired menu using the left soft key Menu navigation keys and the OK key And you can also take a shortcut by pressing the corresponding number key of desired menu after pressing the left soft key Menu MenuTree Menu Tree 35 1 1 Home 1 2 Bookmarks 1 3 Go to URL 1 4 History 1 5 Settings 1 6 Information 1 Browser 2 1 All calls 2 2 Missed c...

Page 150: ...der 4 Multimedia 5 1 New message 5 2 Inbox 0 0 5 3 Email box 5 4 Drafts 0 5 5 Outbox 0 5 6 Sent 0 5 7 Listen to Voice mail 5 8 Info message 5 9 Templates 5 0 Settings 5 Messaging 6 1 Images 6 2 Sounds 6 3 Videos 6 4 Documents 6 5 Others 6 6 Games Apps 6 7 External memory 6 My stuff ...

Page 151: ...files 8 1 Search 8 2 New contact 8 3 Speed dials 8 4 Groups 8 5 Copy all 8 6 Delete all 8 7 Settings 8 8 Information 8 Contacts 9 1 Date Time 9 2 Language 9 3 Display 9 4 Connectivity 9 5 Call 9 6 Security 9 7 Flight mode 9 8 Power save 9 9 Reset default 9 0 Memory status 9 Settings ...

Page 152: ... the homepage is displayed The content depends on the service provider To exit the browser at any time press the key The phone will return to the idle menu Navigating with the WAP browser You can surf the Internet using either the phone keys or the WAP browser menu Using the phone keys When surfing the Internet the phone keys function differently to phone mode Key Description Scrolls each line of ...

Page 153: ...ect New bookmark and press the OK key 3 After entering the desired URL and title press the OK key After selecting a desired bookmark the following options are available v Connect Connects to the selected bookmark v View You can see the selected bookmark v Edit You can edit the URL and or the title of the selected bookmark v New bookmark Select this to create a new bookmark v Send URL via Sends the...

Page 154: ...ault profiles for some operators stored in phone memory It s impossible to rename default profiles Each profile has submenus as follows v Activate Activates the selected profile v View You can see the selected profile v Edit You can edit the selected profile v New profile You can add a new profile v Delete Deletes the selected profile from the list v Delete all Deletes all profile from the list v ...

Page 155: ...nu 1 5 3 Check whether a cookie is used or not Security certificates Menu 1 5 4 You can see the list of personal Certificates that have been stored in your phone Information Menu1 6 You can view the information of WAP browser version Note v A cache is a buffer memory which is used to save data temporarily Browser 41 ...

Page 156: ...you view the last 50 unanswered calls You can also v View the number if available and call it or save it in the Address Book v Enter a new name for the number and save both in the Address Book v Send a message to this number v Delete the call from the list Dialledcalls Menu2 3 This option lets you view the last 50 outgoing calls called or attempted You can also v View the number if available and c...

Page 157: ...ge to this number v Delete the call from the list Callduration Menu2 5 Allows you to view the duration of your incoming and outgoing calls You can also reset the call times The following timers are available v Last call Length of the last call v Dialled calls Length of the outgoing calls v Received calls Length of the incoming calls v All calls Total length of all calls made and incoming calls sin...

Page 158: ...remaining and reset the cost To reset the cost you need to PIN2 code Datainformation Menu2 7 You can check the amount of data transferred over the network through the GPRS information option In addition you can also view how much time you are online Call history Call history 44 ...

Page 159: ...t to your pre defined numbers without the notice of the un authorized user Set LMT Menu 3 1 1 1 A List of tools is displayed 2 Select Lost Mobile track 3 Select Set LMT 4 Select ON press OK Change password Menu 3 1 2 1 A List of tools is displayed 2 Select Lost Mobile track 3 Select CHANGE PASSWORD 4 Enter old password as well as new password LMT Settings Menu 3 1 3 1 A List of tools is displayed ...

Page 160: ...for accessing Lost Mobile Track User can change the LMT code by confirming old LMT code and entering new LMT code The LMT SETTINGS is for configuring your name and given mobile numbers where In case of stolen mobile you wish to get the lost mobile SMS e g friends family members mobile numbers How to use Lost Mobile Track 1 Go to tools menu 2 Select Lost Mobile track 3 Enter Default LMT security co...

Page 161: ...ow up On top of the screen there are sections for date Whenever you change the date the calendar will be updated according to the date And square cursor will be used to locate the certain day If you see marked date in the calendar it means that there is a schedule or memo that day This function helps to remind you of your schedule and memo The phone will sound an alarm tone if you set this for the...

Page 162: ...New schedule SMS You can add New schedule SMS for particular date time v New schedule Allows you to add new schedule for the chosen day You can store up to 100 notes Input the subject and then press left soft key OK You enter the appropriate information in the follow section Time Repeat and Alarm v Scheduler tone You can set the alarm tone of each chosen date v All schedules View all schedules for...

Page 163: ...s and it displays following options v View View all scheduled SMS and Calendar Schedule v New schedule SMS Allows you to add new schedule SMS v New schedule Allows you to add new schedule and memo for the chosen day You can store up to 100 notes Input the subject and then press left soft key OK You enter the appropriate information in the follow section Time Repeat and Alarm v Edit You can Edit se...

Page 164: ...ltiplication and Division Furthermore you can use the various function of calculator such as sin cos tan log ln exp sqrt deg rad 1 Input the numbers by pressing numeric keys 2 Use a navigation key to select a sign for calculation 3 Then input the numbers 4 Press key to view the result 5 To input the decimal number press key 6 To end Calculator press the right soft key Back Memo Menu3 5 1 Select th...

Page 165: ...t Temperature Volume and Velocity 1 You can select one of unit types by pressing OK key 2 Select the unit you want to convert by pressing It s impossible to input symbol in unit converter 3 Select the standard value by using Worldclock Menu3 8 You can view clocks of the world s major cities 1 Select the city belonged to the time zone by pressing key 2 You can set the current time to the city time ...

Page 166: ...SIMservices Menu3 9 This menu depends on SIM and the network services Tools Tools 52 ...

Page 167: ...s stereo AAC ADIF ADTS formats Sampling frequency from 8KHz to 48KHz AAC V1 Bit rate 16 128Kbps V2 Bit rate 16 48Kbps Sampling frequency from 8KHz to 48KHz Note v Because of the small dimension of the speaker in some cases the audio could be distorted especially at maximum volume and when there are lots of bass sounds Therefore we recommend you to use the stereo headset in order to appreciate the ...

Page 168: ...re using Win98 SE you will have to install the Mass storage driver for Windows 98 on CD ROM Note v You should copy MP3 to Sounds MP3 folder If you copy to another folder you will not be able to view the MP3 files v The PC should run Windows 98 SE Windows ME Windows 2000 Windows XP operating system Note v KE770 doesn t support the variable bit rate of all mentioned file types Therefore you can t ch...

Page 169: ...w playlist You can select another file on the MP3 list v Set as ringtone You can set the current music on playing MP3 file as a ringtone Note v In case that any invalid file is included in the playlist an error message will pop and go back to the prior screen Multimedia 55 Options Back Equalizer File name Running time Stereo Playmode Shuffle Progressive bar Volume level Status of the music control...

Page 170: ...sual effect menus Real spectrum Fake This menu allows to change the background of main LCD on playing MP3 file Note v Music is copyright protected in international treaties and national copyright laws It may be necessary to obtain permission or a license to reproduce or copy music In some countries national law prohibits private copying of copyrighted material Please check the national legislation...

Page 171: ... camera button The camera will be ready to use and you may want to rotate the screen into a horizontal position To take clear pictures press the camera button while holding the camera without any movement Appropriately adjust distance to the object that you want take a picture of more than 50 cm Handle carefully since the camera is vulnerable to shock and use a soft cloth when cleaning the camera ...

Page 172: ...conds Then the phone takes a photo after the specified time v Save to You can set the space after taking a picture External Phone v Multi shot Allows to take multishot photos successively v Metering Determines the lighting based on a little part of the subject You can select the Centred and Combined which is to be exposed correctly v Colour effect 4 settings are available Off Sepia Mono Negative v...

Page 173: ...owing Options menus are available v Storage You can choose Phone or External memory v Recording mode You can choose General mode of unlimited recording or MMS mode of recording up to 30 seconds Record 1 Press OK to start recording Once recording is started the message Recording and the counter is displayed 2 If you want to pause or resume recording press left soft key or OK key 3 If you want to fi...

Page 174: ...ers of recipient 2 Press key to add more recipients 3 You can add phone numbers in the address book 4 Press the Option and then press send after entering numbers v Insert Symbol You add special characters Image You can insert the images You can also save some EMS Images here from some images of received SMS messages and use it when sending to another message Sound You can insert sounds that are av...

Page 175: ... The message you have written is not saved Multimedia Menu 5 1 2 You can write and edit multimedia messages checking message size 1 Enter the New message menu by pressing the left soft key OK 2 If you want to write a new message select Multimedia 3 You can create a new message or choose one of the multimedia message templates already made Maximum available file size that can be inserted to MMS mes...

Page 176: ...T9 input mode by selecting T9 off v New T9 word Select the New T9 word for inputting New word into the dictionary v Exit You can get back to the Message menu Note v If you select a picture with a large file size 200K for example on writing multimedia message the loading duration will take around 10 seconds Furthermore you can t activate any keys during the loading time After about 10 seconds you s...

Page 177: ...re v Attachments You can attach file with this menu v Preview You can preview the writing mail v Save to drafts Select this to save the message in Drafts v Edit subject You can edit the subject v T9 languages Select the language for T9 input mode You can also deactivate the T9 input mode by selecting T9 off v New T9 word Select the New T9 word menu for inputting a new word into the dictionary v Cl...

Page 178: ... To read a message select one of the messages by pressing the left soft key Note v For each e mail account you may save up to 40 messages totally 200 for five accounts In Inbox folder you may save not more than 20 messages in Drafts and Outbox folders 5 messages and in Sent folder up to 10 messages In case Drafts Outbox or Sent folder is full and you try to save new message to one of this folders ...

Page 179: ...essage type Message size v Multi delete After selecting the messages you want to remove you can delete the selected messages v Delete all read You can delete all messages read v Delete all You can delete all messages Emailbox Menu5 3 When you access this menu you can either connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new email messages or you can view the previously retrieved email messages wi...

Page 180: ... OK and you can delete the selected messages v Delete all Deletes all of the messages in the folder Outbox Menu5 5 This menu allows to view the message which is about to send or is failed sending After sending the message successfully the message will be moved to sent box v View You can view the message v Delete You can delete the message v Resend You can resend the selected message v Edit Modifie...

Page 181: ...on such as weather reports traffic news taxis pharmacies and stock prices Each type of has the number therefore you can contact service provider as long as you have input the certain number for the information When you have received an info service message you can see the popup message to show you that you have received a message or the info service message is directly displayed To view the messag...

Page 182: ... and delete info message category which you added v Active list You can select info service message numbers in the active list if you activate an info service number you can receive messages sent from the number Templates Menu5 9 Text Menu 5 9 1 You have 6 text templates as below Please call me back I m late I will be there at Where are you now I m on the way Urgent Please contact I love you The f...

Page 183: ...s v Save Allows you to save new multimedia templates you created v Insert You can add Symbol Image Video Sound New slide Text template Contact Business card and Others v Preview You can preview multimedia templates you wrote v Edit subject Allows you to modify the multimedia message you have chosen v Slide duration You can set the duration of slide of multimedia message v T9 languages Select the d...

Page 184: ...ply and charge the cost of the reply to your telephone bill v Message centre number If you want to send the text message you can receive the address of SMS centre through this menu v Bearer setting You can set the bearer setting such as GSM GPRS Multimedia message Menu 5 0 2 v Subject You can enter multimedia messages subject when this menu is on v Slide duration Display the duration of each page ...

Page 185: ...essage server you can set URL for multimedia message server v Permitted message type Personal Personal message Advertisement Commercial message Information Necessary information Email Menu 5 0 3 v Email account This menu allows you to edit delete or add an email account View You can see the Email Set as default Edit Account name Account name Email address Enter the email address given to you by yo...

Page 186: ...umber Allow you to edit SMTP port number Outgoing mail authentication when you send the mail you can set authentication whether or not Outgoing server ID password Enter the ID and password for sending your email New account You can set up to 5 email accounts by selecting New account menu Using the Edit menu you can set the following values Delete Deletes the selected account from the list Delete a...

Page 187: ...ether you will receive the message or not Info message Menu 5 0 6 v Receive Yes If you select this menu your phone will receive Info service messages No If you select this menu your phone will not receive Info service messages any more v Alerts On Your phone will beep when you have received Info service message numbers Off Your phone will not beep even though you have received info service message...

Page 188: ...yed horizontally as a wallpaper v Send via Allows you to send a image through MMS Bluetooth Email v File Rename Change the file name of selected file You can not change the extension of file Move to folder Move the selected file to the folder Move to external memory Move the selected file to the Multimedia memory external memory Warning Ifyouremovetheexternalmemory duringdatatransfer itcanseriousl...

Page 189: ...te a new folder v Multi delete You can remove a number of files you selected v Delete all Delete all files in the list v List view Allows you to set the view type Sounds Menu6 2 Show the list of MP3 AAC IMY WAV AMR MIDI files at Sounds folder in Multimedia memory v Play You can play the MP3 file when pressing OK key or selecting Play menu of Option menu v Set as Currently selected sound can be set...

Page 190: ...File You can save move copy the folder or external memory Rename Change the file name of selected file The maximum length of characters is 36 And you can not change the extension of file Move to folder Move the selected file to the folder Move to external memory Move the selected file to the Multimedia memory external memory Copy to external memory Copy the selected file to the Multimedia memory e...

Page 191: ...ments Menu6 4 This menu enables you to view document files txt ppt pdf doc and excel You can use the following Options menu v View You can see the document file when pressing the OK key or selecting View menu of Option menus v Information Show the file information Others Menu6 5 Show the list of files in My media Others in the Multimedia memory My stuff 77 ...

Page 192: ...card must be installed in order for the phone to be recognised as a removeable disk Note v When you connect the phone with a PC via Bluetooth you can both send and receive files to the Music and Video folders You can copy move any file type to the External Memory You can only receive files from the Photos Sounds and Images folders You can not able to view play files in the Others folder When conne...

Page 193: ... DO NOT remove the cable while you are downloading files After you download the files you need to click Safely Remove Hardware on the PC and then disconnect the cable v When you copy a file to the removable disk you can see a message on the display transferring It means MASS STORAGE is working and data is being transferred While transferring do not disconnect the cable If you disconnect the cable ...

Page 194: ...to the profile you want to activate and press the left soft key OK or OK key 3 Then select Activate Personalise Menu 7 X 2 Scroll to the desired profile in the Profile list After pressing the left soft key or the OK key select Personalise The profile setting option opens Set the option as required v Call alert type Set the alert type for incoming calls v Ring tones Select the desired ring tone fro...

Page 195: ...tone v Keypad volume Set the volume of keypad tone v Effect sound volume Set the volume of effect sound v Power on off volume Set the volume of the ringing tone when switching the phone on off Note v All profiles cannot be renamed Profiles 81 ...

Page 196: ...to the selected number v Send via You can send the data of phone book via Text message Multimedia message Bluetooth or Email v Delete You can delete an entry v New contact After selecting the place SIM Phone you want to save you can add to the phonebook list v Multi delete Allows you to remove a number of files selected v Copy to handset SIM You can copy an entry from SIM to phone or from phone to...

Page 197: ...ress left soft key Options Speeddials Menu8 3 You can assign any of the keys to with a Name list entry You can call directly by pressing this key 1 Open the phonebook first by pressing the right soft key Contacts in standby mode 2 Scroll to Speed dial then press the left soft key OK 3 If you want to add speed dial select empty by pressing the left soft key Assign Then you can search the name in ph...

Page 198: ...emove member You can remove the member from the Group member list But the name and the number will be remained in phonebook v Remove all members Allows you to delete all the members in the group v Rename You can change a group name Copyall Menu8 5 You can copy entries from SIM card memory to Phone memory and vice versa v SIM to phone You can copy the entry from SIM Card to Phone memory v Phone to ...

Page 199: ...formation of character and picture Information Menu8 8 v Service dial numbers Use this function to access a particular list of services provided by your network operator if supported by the SIM card v Own numbers SIM dependent You can save and check your own number in SIM card v Business card This option allows you to create your own business card featuring Name and an mobile phone number To creat...

Page 200: ...r can set the time format between 24 hours and 12 hours Auto update Menu 9 1 5 Select On the phone will automatically update the data and time Language Menu9 2 You can change the language for the display texts in your phone This change will also affect the Language Input mode Display Menu9 3 Wallpaper Menu 9 3 1 You can select the background pictures in standby mode Backlight Time Menu 9 3 2 You c...

Page 201: ...rovides you with two dialing styles Color style Digital style Standby text Menu 9 3 7 If you select On you can edit the text which is displayed in standby mode Network name Menu 9 3 8 If this function is activated network name will be displayed on LCD Connectivity Menu9 4 Bluetooth Menu 9 4 1 Bluetooth QD ID B012427 Bluetooth enables compatible mobile devices peripherals and computers that are in ...

Page 202: ...you should connect with those devices Then you can use those devices Note v When you receive data from another Bluetooth device the phone requests confirmation After confirming the transfer the file will be copied on to your phone v Depending on the file type it will be stored in the following folders Video 3gp mp4 Videos folder Image bmp gif jpg png Images folder Sound amr wav aac Sounds folder M...

Page 203: ...ser Manual of the device you are initiating the pair with to see if it already has a predetermined passcode in place Rename Allows you to change the name of the paired Bluetooth device and how it is displayed on the handset Set as authorised Set as unauthorised Allows you to set an authorised connection between each Bluetooth device For example if you regularly use a Bluetooth headset with your ph...

Page 204: ...ce you have selected Automatic the phone will be set to Automatic even though the power is off and on v Manual The phone will find the list of available networks and show you them Then you can select the network which you want to use if this network has a roaming agreement with your home network operator The phone let you select another network if the phone fails to access the selected network v P...

Page 205: ... GPRS connection is established when you connect a WAP or application service and closed when you end the WAP or applicaion connection Network profile Menu 9 4 2 3 v Data connections Name You can type the network name Bearer You can set the bearer data service 1 Data 2 GPRS Data settings Appears only if you select Data Settings as a Bearer service Dial number Enter the telephone number to dial to ...

Page 206: ...hen GPRS is chosen as a bearer service APN Input the APN of the GPRS User ID The users identify for your APN server Password The password required by your APN server Primary server Input the IP address of the primary DNS server you access Secondary server Input the IP address of the secondary DNS server you access USB connection mode Menu 9 4 3 You can choose one mode of Data service and Mass stor...

Page 207: ...Call divert service allows you to divert incoming voice calls fax calls and data calls to another number For details contact your service provider v All voice calls Diverts voice calls unconditionally v If busy Diverts voice calls when the phone is in use v If no reply Diverts voice calls which you do not answer v If out of reach Diverts voice calls when the phone is switched off or out of coverag...

Page 208: ...fax calls menus To other number Inputs the number for diverting To favourite number You can check recent 5 diverted numbers Cancel Deactivate the corresponding service View status View the status of the corresponding service Answer mode Menu 9 5 2 v Any key If you select this menu you can receive a call by pressing any key except End key v Send key only If you select this menu you can receive a ca...

Page 209: ... will be shown on the receiver s phone v Off Your phone number will not be shown Call waiting Menu9 5 4 network dependent v Activate If you select Activate you can accept a waiting receiving call v Cancel If you select Cancel you cannot recognize the waiting receiving call v View status Shows the status of Call waiting Minute minder Menu 9 5 5 If you select On you can check the call duration by a ...

Page 210: ...ed phone services Security Menu9 6 PIN code request Menu 9 6 1 In this menu you can set the phone to ask for the PIN code of your SIM card when the phone is switched on If this function is activated you ll be requested to enter the PIN code 1 Select PIN code request in the security settings menu and then press OK 2 Set On Off 3 If you want to change the setting you need to enter PIN code when you ...

Page 211: ...rity code only when you change your SIM card Call barring Menu 9 6 4 The Call barring service prevents your phone from making or receiving certain category of calls This function requires the call barring password You can view the following submenus v All outgoing The barring service for all outgoing calls v Outgoing international The barring service for all outgoing international calls v O G inte...

Page 212: ...ll restriction off View status View the status whether the calls are barred or not Fixed dial number Menu 9 6 5 SIM dependent You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers The numbers are protected by your PIN2 code v On You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers v Off You can cancel fixed dialling function v Number list You can view the number list saved as Fi...

Page 213: ...fy them Flightmode Menu9 7 This allows you to use only the phone s features that do not require the use of the wireless network when you are in an airplane or in places where the wireless network is prevented If you set the flight mode on the icon will be displayed on the screen instead of the network signal icon v On You cannot make or receive any calls including emergency calls or use other feat...

Page 214: ...etdefault Menu9 9 You can initialize all factory defaults You will need Security code to activate this function Memorystatus Menu9 0 You can check free space and memory usage of each repository Internal memory and Multimedia memory You can go to each repository menu Settings Settings 100 ...

Page 215: ...nge the data between them Hands free earmicrophone Note Always use genuine LG accessories Failure to do this may invalidate your warranty Accessories may be different in different regions please check with our regional service company or agent for further inquires There are various accessories for your mobile phone You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements ...

Page 216: ...Technicaldata Technical data 102 General Product name KE770 System GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 Phoneusagetemperaturelimit Normal 55 C When charging 45 C ...

Page 217: ......

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands